CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT

CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT

FIRE STATION NO. 28 RENOVATION

GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

PROJECT MANUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

PROJECT #: 17052.01 MAY 10, 2019

(REVISION JULY 19, 2019)

BLANK PAGE

City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 23 00 Alternates 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 45 23 Testing & Inspection 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste management 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 01 81 19 Construction Indoor Air Quality 01 81 23 Noise and Vibration Control

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition PMSM

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork SWA 03 20 00 Reinforcing Steel SWA 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete SWA

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel SWA 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing SWA


TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry SWA 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing PMSM 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry PMSM 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework PMSM

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation PMSM 07 27 00 Air Barrier PMSM 07 42 13 Metal Screen Wall PMSM 07 51 13 Cold Process Built-Up Asphalt Roofing System PMSM 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim PMSM 07 84 00 Fire Stopping PMSM 07 92 05 Joint Sealers PMSM

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PMSM 08 14 29 Prefinished Wood Doors PMSM 08 14 76 Bifolding Wood Doors PMSM 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows PMSM 08 71 00 Door Hardware ALLEGION 08 80 00 Glazing PMSM

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 05 61 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation PMSM 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies PMSM 09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board PMSM 09 24 00 Portland Cement Plaster PMSM 09 30 00 Tiling PMSM 09 65 13 Resilient Flooring Base PMSM 09 68 13 Carpet Tile PMSM 09 91 00 Painting and Coating PMSM

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 24 Signage PMSM 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories PMSM

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 36 60 Countertops PMSM


TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Protection GM 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems GM

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing GM 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping GM 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping GM 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 05 48 Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation GM 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping GM 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties GM 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping GM 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties GM 22 34 00 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters GM 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures GM 22 47 00 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers GM

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC GM 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment GM 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC GM 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation GM 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping GM 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping GM 23 31 13 Metal Ducts GM 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories GM 23 34 43 Ceiling Fans GM 23 37 13 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers GM 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioners GM

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical GM 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables GM 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems GM 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems GM 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems GM 26 24 16 Panelboards GM 26 27 26 Wiring Devices GM 26 51 00 Interior Lighting GM

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS


TABLE OF CONTENTS 4

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 17 23 Pavement Markings PMSM

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

EXHIBIT A Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials – Fire Station 28 LA Testing Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips – Fire Station 28 LA Testing

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01

Fire Station No. 28 Renovation

Construction Documents

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Type of the Contract.

3. Work phases.

4. Use of premises.

5. Owner's occupancy requirements.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification formats and conventions.

8. Deferred Approvals.

9. Pollution Control.

10. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.

11. Lead-Containing materials.

12. Additional DSA requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit written statement of responsibility per CBC 1706A.1

B. R & B Schultz Early Childhood Education Building

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: City of Glendale Fire Department Fire Station 28 Renovation

1. Project Location: 4410 New York Ave, Glendale, CA 91214

B. Owner: City of Glendale

C. Architect: PMSM.

D. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes exterior and interior renovations to building residential and work areas.

The work is inclusive of architectural, structural and mechanical renovations.




SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

2. The intent of these drawings and specifications is that the alteration, rehabilitation or

reconstruction is to be in accordance with Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Should

any existing conditions such as deterioration or non-complying construction be discovered

which is not covered by the contract documents wherein the finished work will not comply

with Title 24, California Code of Regulations, a Construction Change Document, or a

separate set of plans and specifications, detailing and specifying the required repair work

shall be submitted to and approved by the City of Glendale before proceeding with the

repair work.

1.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.6 WORK PHASES

A. The Work shall be conducted in single phase.

1.7 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated

on Drawings by the Contract limits.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project

site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use

these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

1.8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction

period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate

Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations.

Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities

without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's

operations.

B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and

to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion,




SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3

provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of

equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner

occupancy.

3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully

operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On

occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving

occupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for

occupied portions of building.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work Hours:

1. Comply with General Conditions.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49-

division format and CSI's Master Format 2004 numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-

referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric

sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are

not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine

numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the

Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words

implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be

interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as

the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for




SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4

clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by

others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are

implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.11 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide positive methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of the soil, water

or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from the construction operations.

1.12 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)

A. The contractor shall submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for approval by the City’s

Public Works and Community Development Departments. The plan shall show erosion control

measures and indicate locations of staging, fueling, equipment and employee parking, and

storage/stockpile locations. Locations for concrete washout shall be shown, as well as gravel site

entrances and/or metal grates to keep soil from being deposited on City streets. The plan shall

note that street sweeping shall occur as often as necessary, to ensure that no dirt or dust will

remain on City streets. Drip pans shall be used under parked equipment and visqueen shall be

shown on the plan to protect the soil in the fueling area. Only minor vehicle maintenance shall

occur on-site. Maintenance shall occur in the fueling area and soil shall be protected by drip pans

and visqueen.

B. Prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and file a Notice of Intent with the

State Water Resources Control Board for this project. The SWPPP will provide Best

Management Practice (BMP) methods and controls for wet weather grading activities and erosion

control for both onsite and offsite improvements, in accordance with the requirements of the

NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity. The

SWPPP shall include an erosion control plan.

1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Noise and Dust Control: As specified in General Conditions.

1.14 LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS.

A. The Contractor shall assume that all ceramic tile and painted or varnished surfaces in the school

district contain detectable levels of lead which trigger compliance with California Code of

Regulation, Title 8, Section 1532.1. In addition, waste products from these materials could

contain lead at levels which are subject to the hazardous waste requirements in the California

Code of Regulations, Title 22, Sections 666260.1 - 66263.12 and 66268.1 - 66268.124 and the

health and Safety Code Section 25157.8 and 25163, subdivision (c).

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to handle and dispose of these materials in accordance with

the regulations. If failure to comply with these regulations results in a site or worker




SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 5

contamination, the Contractor will be held solely responsible for all costs involved in any required

corrective action.

C. Lead-based paint should be removed only by professionals trained in hazardous material removal.

A trained professional must follow very detailed procedures to minimize, control and contain lead

dust generated by the removal process.

1. The room should be sealed from the rest of the building. All furniture, carpets and drapes

should be removed.

2. Workers should wear respirators designed to avoid inhaling lead.

3. No eating or drinking should be allowed in the work area. All food and eating utensils

should be removed from the room. All cabinets as well as food contact surfaces should be

covered and sealed.

4. Occupants should be kept out of the room until the job is completed.

5. Clothing worn in the room should be disposed of after working. The work clothing should

not be worn in other areas of the building.

6. Debris should be cleaned up using special vacuum cleaners with HEPA (high efficiency

particle absorption) filters. A wet mop should be used after vacuuming.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION




ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1

SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in

the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract

Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work

of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in

writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or

deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to

alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. All substitutions affecting access compliance safety, fire life safety, or structural safety shall be

considered as Construction Change Document or Addenda, and shall be approved by the City of

Glendale prior to fabrication and installation.




ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE

A. As indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect may issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or Changes not affecting the

Structural Safety, Access Compliance or Fire & Life Safety portions of the work, on

AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions" or an equivalent form acceptable

to the City of Glendale.

1.4 REQUESTS FOR PROPOSAL (RFP)

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect may issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued are for information only. Do not consider them instructions

either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a

quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary

to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish

times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an

extension of the Contract Time.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE PROCESS

A. Changes or alterations of the approved plans or specifications after a contract for the work has

been let affecting the Structural, Access or Fire-Life Safety portions of the project shall be made

only by means of Construction Change Documents submitted to and approved by City of Glendale

prior to commencement of the work shown thereon. Construction Change Documents shall

comply with the City of Glendale’s Construction Change Document Submittal and Approval

Process requirements. All Construction Change Documents and supplementary drawings shall

be stamped and signed by the architect or engineer in general responsible charge of observation

of the work of construction of the project and by the architect or registered engineer delegated

responsibility for observation of the portion of the work of construction affected by the change

order, shall bear the approval of the City of Glendale and shall indicate the associated change in

the project cost, if any. One copy of each Construction Change Document is required for the files

of the City of Glendale.

B. Construction Change Documents shall be signed by Architect of Record, Structural Engineer

(when applicable), Delegated Professional Engineer (when applicable), and the City of Glendale.

C. No changes shall be made to approved documents without the City of Glendale’s approval.



END OF SECTION




PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule

and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum

to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for

Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's

Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and

schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.

b. Submittals Schedule.

c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days

before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. No payment applications will be signed by the Architect prior to the Contractor submitting,

and the Architect reviewing, a schedule of values.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items

for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.





1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.

3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.

c. Name of subcontractor.

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

e. Name of supplier.

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to

total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project

Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,

where appropriate.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and

stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified,

include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values

or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times:

1. The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and

Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is

the period indicated in the Agreement.





C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation

Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last

day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to

Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien

and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Products list.

5. Schedule of unit prices.

6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

9. Copies of building permits.

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work.

11. Initial progress report.

12. Report of preconstruction conference.

13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of

the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the

following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that

taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.





4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.



END OF SECTION


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 RFI FORM

RFI FORM

Project: RFI No: Project No: To: Date: From:

Subject: Discipline: Category Specification Section Title: Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph: Sheet Number: Detail:

Question: Suggestion:

Attachment: Undersigned certifies:

• Both drawings and specification sections were thoroughly reviewed.

• Processing time for frivolous RFIs will be charged back to Contractors at A/E billable rates.

Desired Response Date: (However, A/E still have specified days to respond.) Cost Impact: $ Schedule Impact: days Drawing Impact: Submitted by: Signed: Date:

Answer: Answered by:

Signed: Date:

Copies: Owner Consultants

File

1. A/E review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology of the Contractor.

2. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit each RFI to a single issue. Information that is discernable from the contract documents; construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and construction site safety will not be addressed by the A/E in responding to a RFI.

3. A/E response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in construction cost or time.

End of RFI Form


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 RFI FORM

Blank Page




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Project meetings.

2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

3. Project Coordination


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and

control points.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or

after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required

for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.





C. Each Prime Contractor shall participate in these coordination requirements. Each Prime Con-

tractor shall advise during Progress Meetings, the status of overall coordination progress. When

necessary, such as in congested spaces where multiple prime contracts are involved, the prime

contractors shall meet with the Architect, Owners Representative and other prime contractors

involved to resolve critical coordination areas.

D. In the event of coordination disputes or questions, the prime contractors involved shall submit

the question or dispute to the Architect. The Architect will provide specific direction relating

to the question or dispute. The Owner will not consider requests for additional time or com-

pensation associated with direction provided to prime contractors in response to coordination,

questions, or disputes.

E. Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products

and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited

space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of differ-

ent components.

F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

2. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

3. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

4. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

5. Delivery and processing of submittals.

6. Progress meetings.

7. Pre-installation conferences.

8. Project closeout activities.

9. Startup and adjustment of systems.

10. Project closeout activities.

G. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

11. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated

into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are

designated as Owner's property.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.





3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting

minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the

meeting.

4. Frequency of Attendance by Architect: Limited by Architect/Owner Contract.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,

at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the

Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the

meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing, if any.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

f. Procedures for RFIs.

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Preparation of Record Documents.

l. Use of the premises.

m. Work restrictions.

n. Owner's occupancy requirements.

o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

p. Construction waste management and recycling.

q. Parking availability.

r. Office, work, and storage areas.

s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

t. First aid.

u. Security.

v. Progress cleaning.

w. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect

of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.





d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work

and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings

with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do

so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.





3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.

19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised

schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.5 RFIs:

A. General:

1. Contractor may submit a RFI to the Architect seeking clarification or interpretation of the

contract documents. If in the Contractor's opinion the nature of the RFI requires a

discussion, rather than simply an answer, the Contractor shall call the Architect to have

such a discussion. The results of that discussion as well as all other RFI's must be presented

in writing on a form approved in advanced by the Architect along with any supporting

information or data, as well as the Contractor's recommended resolution. An oral RFI or a

RFI presented on an unapproved form, or without adequate supporting information and

Contractor's recommended solution, will be attributed solely to the contractor. Architect's

review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure

related to the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of the

Contractor.

2. Architect's review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or

procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology

of the Contractor.

3. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit

each RFI to a single issue. Information which is discernable from the contract documents;

construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and

construction site safety will not be addressed by the Architect in responding to a RFI.

4. Architect's response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in

construction cost or time.





B. All substitutions and Requests for Information (RFI) that affect Structural Safety, Fire-Life

Safety, Access Compliance or Energy (as applicable) shall be submitted to the Division of the

State Architect for review and approval.

C. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the

form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will

be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work

or work of subcontractors.

D. Frivolous or Unnecessary RFIs: Cost of design professional’s time will be billed or deducted from

progress payment.

E. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the

following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Architect.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature.

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies,

and attachments.

F. Hard-Copy RFIs: Form at end of this Section.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

G. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.

Allow 21 days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be

considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will start again.





3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract

Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1

Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI

response.

H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work and Proposal Request, as appropriate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request.

1. RFI Form.

2. RFI Log.

END OF SECTION




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress

of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submittals Schedule.

3. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule.

4. Daily construction reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing

meeting and conference minutes.

3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a

tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal.

2. Specification Section number and title.

3. Submittal category (action or informational).

4. Name of subcontractor.

5. Description of the Work covered.

6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or review.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of schedule, large enough

(minimum 11 x 17) to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction

activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.





B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,

Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Concurrent with the development of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete

schedule of submittals. Submit the submittal schedule with the Contractor's construction schedule

described above.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list

of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule.

2. The Architect will review the schedule and indicate which submittals may be deleted from

the submission requirement. The deletion of the submittal requirement for an item does not

release the Contractor from any requirements of the Construction Contract, General

Conditions or Plans and Specifications.

B. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days

of construction. Provide the following information:

1. Scheduled date for the first submittal.

2. Related Section number.

3. Submittal category.

4. Name of subcontractor.

5. Description of the part of the Work covered.

6. Scheduled date for resubmittal.

7. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or review.

C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,

Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post

copies in the project meeting room and field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the

Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's

construction schedule. Submit within 15 days of the date established for "Commencement of the

Work". The Construction Schedule must be submitted and accepted prior to approval of first pay

application.





1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous

vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of

units of the Work as identified in the "Schedule of Values".

2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments.

As work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.

3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable reproducible media, of

sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.

4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities;

include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper

sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of

the Work.

5. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of

subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules.

6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate

Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by

requirements for phased completion to permit work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy

by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion.

C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including testing and installation.

D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each

major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or

integrated with other activities.

E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, indicating

"pre-calculated" and "actual" costs. On the line show dollar-volume of work performed as of the

dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. Refer to Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

2.3 THREE WEEK LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULE

A. Prepare weekly (or as determined by scheduled meeting times), prior to Project meetings, a

computer-generated 3-week look-ahead schedule (bar chart) which is consistent with the

Contractors schedule and depicts daily labor activities. The schedule will consist of the prior

week, current week and the following 3 weeks.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.

7. Accidents.





8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial Completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly

scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such

meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates changes, including, but not limited

to, changes in durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of reviewed schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

3.2 FORMS


1. Submittals Schedule Form.

END OF SECTION




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,

Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Consult individual sections of specifications for specific submittals required under those sections

and for further details and descriptions of requirements.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the

Schedule of Values.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing

meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

5. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

6. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

7. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

8. Other Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive

action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.





1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Processing: All costs for printing, preparing, packaging, submitting, mailing, or delivering

submittals for initial submittals and all costs for re-printing, re-drawing, re-drafting, re-packaging,

re-submitting, and re-mailing or re-delivering as required for all re-submittals shall be included

in Contract Sum.

B. Sequence: Transmit each submittal in sequence which will not result in Architect’s approval

having to be later modified or rescinded by reason of subsequent submittals which should have

been processed earlier or concurrently for coordination.

C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress

Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related

construction activities.

E. Multiple Reviews: The Contractor shall also be responsible for all costs to Architect or Architect

consultants for reviews requiring more than 2 reviews for same specification section.

F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of

the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance

of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Review: Allow 21 days for review of each submittal. Architect will request for more time

if needed.

G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name and address of Contractor.

e. Name and address of subcontractor.

f. Name and address of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Each submittal number shall be unique as follows:

1) Format shall be as follows:





a) Sequential Number - Revision Number - Project Specification Section

Number (e.g., 1-1-09910). Do not use letters.

2) Submittal number shall be sequential starting with 1 (e.g., 1-#-#####).

3) First submittal for each section shall have number 1 as the “revision” number.

(e.g., #-1-#####)

4) Resubmittal for same specification section shall have same first digit as the

original submittal and sequential second digit revision number (e.g., #-2-

##### as in second submittal).

5) Sample submittal log would look like the following in the submittal number

column: Note that 1-2-09910 is second submittal.

Submittal Number

1-1-099100

1-2-099100 (revised submittal: shown for clarity)

2-1-055000

3-1-077200

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

l. Other necessary identification.

H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract

Documents on submittals.

I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect

observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve

as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken

and will be returned.

J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without

review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.

K. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “Approved” or “Furnish as Noted”.

L. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

M. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval by Architect.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

a. Circle items applicable.

b. Cross-out items not applicable.

c. Select item number if required.

3. Submittal data must include complete documentation relating to all the specified features

4. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s Submittal Form with all the options selected when available.

b. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

c. Manufacturer's product specifications.

d. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

e. Standard color charts.

f. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

g. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

h. Printed performance curves.

i. Operational range diagrams.

j. Mill reports.

k. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.

l. Compliance with specified referenced standards.

m. Testing by recognized testing agency.

n. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

o. Notation of coordination requirements.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Number of Copies: Submit 6 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect

will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.

b. Do not use words "by others." Use words which depict exactly who is responsible

for the work.

c. Identification of products.

d. Fabrication and installation drawings.

e. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.

f. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring.

g. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.

h. Templates and patterns.





i. Schedules.

j. Design calculations.

k. Compliance with specified standards.

l. Notation of coordination requirements.

m. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

n. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

o. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

p. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 sets of prints.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit 1 full set of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's

product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample

sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a

Project Record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be

demonstrated.





2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of

paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include

the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.

2. Number and name of room or space.

3. Location within room or space.

4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction

Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit 2 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed

by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project

Management and Coordination."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and

addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply

with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification

(WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and

personnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.





F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation

of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on

comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect

for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Quality Requirements."

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before

installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation

needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation

of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in

the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment.





Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance

and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of

assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load

diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.

Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product

or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates.

2. Required substrate tolerances.

3. Sequence of installation or erection.

4. Required installation tolerances.

5. Required adjustments.

6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of

coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

2.3 DEFERRED APPROVALS AND DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required

submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design

professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or

certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for

compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with

approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

1. Coordinate the work; do not delegate responsibility for coordination to any subcontractor.

2. Anticipate the interrelationship of all subcontractors and their relationship with the total

work.

3. Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and materials suppliers concerning

coordination, interference, or extent of work between sections.

4. Trade submittals with “By Others”, “By General Contractor”, or similar coordination and

work scope are not allowed. Identify, acknowledge, and resolve scope of work prior to

submittal by Contractor. No extras will be allowed. Provide complete and coordinated

submittals.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and

approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

F. Architect’s and Consultant’s review shall neither be construed as complete check nor relieve the

Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, or supplier from responsibility for any

deficiency that may exist or from any departures or deviations from the requirements of the

Contract unless the Contractor has, in writing, called the Architect’s attention to the deviations at

the time of submission as specified.

END OF SECTION




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this

Section.


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of

required tests and inspections.

2. Other Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed

construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities

performed by Architect.





C. Mockups:

1. Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify

selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,

testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by

which the Work will be judged.

2. Comprehensive, completely integrated mockups of separate trades showing interface

conditions, transitions, and relationships between materials and finishes.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant,

mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including

installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such

as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to

tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with

special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the

most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before

proceeding.





1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate

their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on

the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Description of test and inspection.

3. Identification of applicable standards.

4. Identification of test and inspection methods.

5. Number of tests and inspections required.

6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.





C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well

as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed professional engineer who is legally qualified

to practice in California and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind

indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,

assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and

extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall

be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing

the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: A City of Glendale approved NRTL, an NVLAP, or an

independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting

indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified

in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to

authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.





1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures."

B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar

quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency

sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date

established for commencement of the Work.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.





B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test

and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas

with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION




REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00

REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes list of references.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. “AHJ”: Agency having jurisdiction.

C. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

D. “Compatible”: When used for products, it shall comply with requirements including products

recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance.

E. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as

"directed."

F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,

in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"

"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

G. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

H. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

I. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.





J. “Owner”: As defined in Division 1 section “Summary”.

K. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which

Project is to be built.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,

applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied

directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of

the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

2. Copies of standards and applicable building codes (Title 24 Parts 1-6 and 9) shall be kept

on-site during construction.

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms

are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of

the standards and regulations.

E. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.

F. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.

G. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.


A. Reference Standards: (Effective January 1, 2017)

1. Part 1 - 2016 California Building Standards Administrative Code, Title 24 C.C.R.

2. Part 2 - 2016 California Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International Building Code

of the International Code Council, with California Amendments).

3. Part 3 - 2016 California Electrical Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2014 National Electrical Code

of the National Fire Protection Association, NFPA).





4. Part 4 - 2016 California Mechanical Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 Uniform Mechanical

Code of the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, IAPMO).

5. Part 5 - 2016 California Plumbing Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 Uniform Plumbing Code

of the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, IAPMO).

6. Part 6 - 2016 California Energy Code, Title 24 C.C.R.

7. Part 8 - 2016 California Historical Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R.

8. Part 9 - 2016 California Fire Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International Fire Code of the

International Code Council).

9. Part 10 - 2016 California Existing Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International

Existing Building Code of the International Code Council, with amendments).

10. Part 11 - 2016 California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code), Title 24

C.C.R.

11. Part 12 - 2016 California Referenced Standards Code, Title 24 C.C.R.

12. NFPA 13 - Automatic Sprinkler Systems (California Amended), 2016 Edition.

13. NFPA 14 - Standpipe Systems (California Amended), 2013 Edition.

14. NFPA 17 - Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013 Edition.

15. NFPA 17A - Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013 Edition.

16. NFPA 20 - Stationary Pumps, 2016 Edition.

17. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains (California Amended), 2016 Edition.

18. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (California Amended) 2016 Edition

(Note: See UL Standard 1971 for “Visual Devices”).

19. NFPA 80 - Fire Door and Other Opening Protectives, 2016 Edition.

20. NFPA 101- Life Safety Code. 2015 Edition

21. NFPA 105 – Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives, 2016

Edition

22. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

23. NFPA 253 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems, 2015 Edition.

24. NFPA 257 – Standard for Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block Assemblies, 2012

Edition

25. NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (California Amended), 2015

Edition.

26. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title II or Title III.



END OF SECTION




TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 1

SECTION 01 45 23

TESTING & INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1. Selection and payment.

1.1.2. Contractor submittals.

1.1.3. Laboratory responsibilities.

1.1.4. Laboratory reports.

1.1.5. Limits on testing laboratory authority.

1.1.6. Contractor responsibilities.

1.1.7. Schedule of inspections and tests.

1.2. SELECTION AND PAYMENT

1.2.1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Class 1 Inspector of Record, and a testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing as specified in this Section.

1.2.1.1. Unless specified as the Owner's responsibility, all other testing, mix design preparation and related quality control and certification requirements shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.

1.2.1.2. All concrete mix designs shall be prepared at Contractor's cost and in compliance with Section 03 30 00, and Division 3.

1.2.1.3. All grout and mortar mix designs shall be prepared at Contractor's cost and in compliance with Division 3.

1.2.2. Only local legally constituted public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, and the City of Glendale or their designated representative shall be authorized to direct testing and inspection to determine compliance or non-compliance to the requirements of the Work.

1.2.3. The Contractor shall reimburse the City of Glendale, through Contract adjustment, for inspection and testing costs caused by the following Contractor actions:

1.2.3.1. All testing costs incurred after initial test established non-conformance with contract requirements.





1.2.3.2. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's scheduling of work requiring inspections of less than 4 hours duration without written approval.

1.2.3.3. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to complete work requiring inspection within the scheduled duration period shown on Contractor's initial construction schedule.

1.2.3.4. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to order sufficient or required quantity of material.

1.2.3.5. Inspection costs of items repaired following damage caused by Contractor.

1.2.3.6. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's substitution of material, system or process, where such inspection and testing is required by the Architect, Owner or jurisdictional authority to demonstrate compliance with specified criteria.

1.2.3.7. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's use of batch plant that does not comply with criteria waiving batch plant inspection.

1.2.3.8. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's use of a supplier or subcontractor requiring inspection services to be performed at a location exceeding a 100 mile radius of project site.

1.2.3.9. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to complete work within normal hours and days, requiring overtime costs.

1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.3.1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located, and currently approved by the City.

1.3.2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.

1.3.3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.3.4. Welding Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC1 Standard for Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI).

1.4. LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

1.4.1. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

1.4.2. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.4.3. Promptly notify Architect of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or Products.





1.4.4. Perform special inspections for areas of work as shown on drawings and specified in respective sections of the specifications in compliance with Section 4-333, Part 1, Title 24, CCR.

1.4.5. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect or Project Manager

1.5. LABORATORY REPORTS

1.5.1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report to Architect, Project Manager, Structural Engineer, Contractor, the City of Glendale, Project Inspector and other parties as required by referenced sections and applicable regulations.

1.5.2. Include:

1.5.2.1. Date issued.

1.5.2.2. Project title, Architect, project number.

1.5.2.3. Name of inspector.

1.5.2.4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.

1.5.2.5. Method of obtaining sample.

1.5.2.6. Identification of product and Specifications section.

1.5.2.7. Location in the Project.

1.5.2.8. Type of inspection or test.

1.5.2.9. Date of test.

1.5.2.10. Results of tests.

1.5.2.11. Conformance with Contract Documents.

1.5.2.12. Indicate samples taken but not tested.

1.5.3. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.

1.5.4. Testing agency shall provide a verified report in compliance with Chapter 4, Part 1, Section 4-336, of Title 24, CCR.

1.5.4.1. Provide such reports in duplicate, on approved form.

1.5.4.2. Provide reports each time work on the project is suspended (dates to be confirmed and coordinated during construction) and at completion of project.

1.5.4.3. Reports shall document actions taken, tests made, and other aspects of the construction operations for the period prescribed.





1.5.5. In addition, Testing Agency shall provide semi-monthly reports as required by Section 4-337, Part 1, Title 24, CCR.

1.6. LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY

1.6.1. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

1.6.2. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

1.6.3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

1.6.4. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.7. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

1.7.1. Deliver or make available to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

1.7.2. Do not incorporate material or products requiring compliance with specified testing and inspection criteria without receiving documentation of compliance from approved agency.

1.7.3. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities.

1.7.4. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to assist testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples.

1.7.4.1. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1.7.4.2. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.

1.7.4.3. Repair and protection is Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.

1.7.5. Contractor shall prepare integrated schedule for the course of construction showing all required inspection and testing. Determine the time required for the laboratory to perform testing and to issue reports and findings. Provide all required testing and inspection time within the construction schedule.

1.7.5.1. Notify Project Manager, Architect, Project Inspector and laboratory minimum two working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.





1.7.5.2. Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1.7.6. Notify the Project Manager with sufficient time in advance of the manufacture or material to be supplied by Owner under the Contract Documents, which must by terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the Owner may arrange for testing at the source of supply.

1.8. SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS BY OWNER'S TESTING AGENCY (WHEN REQUIRED)

1.8.1. Site Excavation, Fills and Foundation Preparation (Title 24, Part 2)

1.8.1.1. All earthwork, including earth fill compaction – 1704A.7, 1705A.6, 1804A.5, APP.J 107

1.8.1.2. Inspection of Excavation/fill Installation – J106

1.8.1.3. Inspection of site soil and backfill– 1705A.6, Table 1705A.6

1.8.2. Concrete (Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 19A)

1.8.2.1. Materials

1.8.2.1.1. Portland Cement – ACI 318 Sec. 3.2, 1903A.1, ASTM C150

1.8.2.1.2. Concrete Aggregates - ACI 318 Sec. 3.3, 1903A.5, 1704A.4.1, 1916A.1

1.8.2.1.3. Reinforcing Bars - ACI 318 Sec. 3.5, 1903A.7, ASTM A615, ASTM 706, 1704A.4.1, 1708.a.2 and 1916.A.2.

1.8.2.1.4. Shotcrete Aggregates – 1903A.5, 1913A.3

1.8.2.1.5. Admixtures– ACI 318-08 Sec 3.6

1.8.2.2. Concrete Quality

1.8.2.2.1. Proportions of Concrete – 1905A.2, 1905A.3, 1905A.4, ACI 318 sec 5.2

1.8.2.2.2. Strength Tests for Concrete – 1905A.1.2, 1905A.6, 1916A.1, ACI 318 sec. 5.6.2

1.8.2.2.3. Shotcrete Cores – 1913A.5

1.8.2.2.4. Shotcrete Proportion – 1913A.2

1.8.2.2.5. Composite Construction Cores – 1916A.4





1.8.2.2.6. Portland Compile Tests – 1704A.4.1, 1916A.1

1.8.2.2.7. Cement Tests – 1913A.1

1.8.2.2.8. Aggregate Tests – 1903A.6

1.8.2.2.9. Rebar Tests – 1913A.2

1.8.2.2.10. Post Installed Anchors – 1913A.7

1.8.2.3. Concrete Inspection

1.8.2.3.1. Job Site Inspection - 1905A.7, ACI 318 Sec. 5.7

1.8.2.3.2. Batch Plant Inspection – 1705A.3.3

1.8.2.3.3. Waiver of Batch Plant Inspection and Tests – 1704A.4.3

1.8.2.3.4. Reinforcing Bar Welding – 1903A.8, 1704A.3.1.3, 1705A.2.2.1.2

1.8.2.3.5. Shotcrete Inspection – 1704A.17, 1916A.5

1.8.2.3.6 Cast-in-place deep foundation- 1705A.8

1.8.3. Structural Steel (Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 22A)

1.8.3.1. Materials

1.8.3.1.1. Structural Steel –2205A

1.8.3.1.2. Cold Formed Steel – 2209A, 2210A

1.8.3.1.3. Material Identification - 2203A.1

1.8.3.1.4. Welded Filler Metal – A3.4 (b) AISC 341-10

1.8.3.2. Inspection of Structural Steel

1.8.3.2.1. Tests of Structural and Cold Formed Steel – 2203A.1, 1704A.3

1.8.3.2.2. Fabrication – 1704A.2.5

1.8.3.2.3. Tests of High Strength Bolts, Nuts, Washers– 2212.A.1

1.8.3.2.4. Shop Fabrication Inspection – 1704A.3.2

1.8.3.2.5. High Strength Bolt Inspection – 2213A.1





1.8.3.2.6. End-welded studs Inspection – 2213A.12

1.8.3.2.7. Welding Inspection – 1705A.2.2.5, J6 AISC 341-10

1.8.4. Miscellaneous Fasteners

1.8.4.1. Anchorage test methods as shown on drawings and specified in respective sections.

1.8.4.2. Tests for post-installed anchors in concrete per CBC 1910A.5 - When post-installed anchors are used in lieu of cast-in place bolts, the installation verification test loads, frequency and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 01 45 29




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work

restrictions.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of

implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

4. Other Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in

those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,

insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are

closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but

not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service:

1. Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service:

1. Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service:

1. Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction

operations.





E. Sanitary Facilities:

1. Pay sanitary service use charge for temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water

for use of construction personnel.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use

as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line

posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.

Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.

B. Wind Screen Fabric: Green.

2.2 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES

A. Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations

adequate for normal loading located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines.

Comply with NFPA 241.

B. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial

Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use

permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

C. Sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly.

Furnish and equip offices and pay for services for following:





1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan

racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide

electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle

on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.

4. Coffee machine and supplies.

5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F.

6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

7. Telephone service to field office and Inspector's/Architects' field office at time of project

mobilization.

8. Facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office and Inspector's/Architects'

field office at time of project mobilization.

9. Internet access with an DSL or Cable (if available) service separate from the dedicated

telephone line to field office and Inspector's/Architect's field office at time of project

mobilization. If a high speed connection is not available, provide dial up service. Switch

to high speed service if it becomes available during the project Provide, maintain and pay

for a computer (including programs) with graphics capabilities, printer and scanner so as

to be able to support communication with the Architect over the internet for reports, logs,

RFIs, change drawings and clarifications distributed by email. This equipment shall be

made available to the Inspector, Architect.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures. Minimum rated at Class 2A-10B:C.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, electric, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic

control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille

in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with

performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.





3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for

construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Install temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Install temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Install temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Install electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,

capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

H. Lighting: Install temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

B. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas if approved

for construction personnel.

C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.





2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification. Install signs where

directed to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not

permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

3. Provide a 4'-0" x 8'-0" project sign constructed of 1/2 inch plywood or 10 mil corrugated

mounted to 4"x4" posts 8'-0" long set 2'-0" deep into earth.

4. Project sign shall include a graphic of the building (available from the Architect), Architect,

Consultants, District, project, funding members with titles, and Contractor with contact

information for the contractor. Text and layout shall be submitted for approval prior to

installation.

5. Location of project sign shall be coordinated with District’s representative.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste

from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable

effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around

excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy

rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems

from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure

fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance

gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient

to accommodate construction operations or as indicated on Drawings.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel.





F. Install full coverage with green wind screen fabric to block viewing through construction fencing.

Wind screen fabric shall be anchored or weighted sufficiently to resist design wind loads indicated

on Drawings.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of

individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and

obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.

2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails,

barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions

for protection and safe passage.

3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence.

4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect.

J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.

Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.

Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the

sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with

not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in

vestibule.

3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.

4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Weather strip openings.

7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.

1. Comply with CFC Chapter 33 – Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition.

2. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

3. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.





4. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at

Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

5. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed

surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM

SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM

Provide minimum 5 similar installations within last 3 years.

Project: ____________________________ From: _________________________________________

To: ____________________________ Date: _________________________________________

Date of

Installation

Project Name Owner Info GC Info Architect info

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

End of Previous Project List Form





PRODUCT LIST FORM

PRODUCT LIST FORM Preliminary Product List.

Complete Product List.

Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

Project: ____________________________ From: _________________________________________

To: ____________________________ Date: _________________________________________

Spec Section Early

approval?

Yes

No

Product Model

No.

Manufacturer Supplier Installer Delivery

Date No. Title

End of Product List Form





PRODUCT LIST FORM


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Substitutions are only allowed within number of days specified. Use this form for requesting “or equal” products and materials.

Project: Substitution Request Number:

From:

To: Date:

Project Number:

Specification Section Title:

Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Specified Item:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Address:

Contact Name: Phone Number:

Comparison between proposed substitution and specified product is attached. Note all differences.

Reason for not using specified item: Specified product is no longer available. Substitution will improve lead time by ______ days Substitution will save Owner $ _____________ Other:

List 3 similar installations including project name, address, owner, and date installed is attached.

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explanation attached.

Supporting Data Attached:

Product Data (indicate any options to be included) Drawings Test Reports Samples Color Chart Other:

Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable is available.

• Proposed substitution will not affect or delay Construction Progress Schedule.

• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.

• Substitutions for products or systems involving structural, fire/life safety and access compliance will require AHJ approval. This will add time required to review those substitutions requiring AHJ approval. Contractor is solely responsible for all documentation, cost, and time required to obtain AHJ approval.

Submitted by: Firm:

Signature: Date:

Comments:

A/E Review:

Approve Substitution. Approve Substitution as Noted. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Substitution request received too late.

Signed by: Date:

Comments:

Owner’s Review and Action (Approval of substitution is not valid without Owner’s signature)

Substitution approved. Substitution approved as Noted. Substitution rejected. Use specified product.

Signed by: Date:

Comments:

End of Substitution Request Form




EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. General installation of products.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.

7. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for

coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and

levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and

elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed by professional engineer.

E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the

existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas, and water-service piping; and underground electrical

services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities

serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator

present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to

be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to

adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.





C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a

detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction

and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by


C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and

topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical

work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level

foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work

requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,

angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

B. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real

property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that





principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the

survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing

improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,

and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with

authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory

prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate

provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.





3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress

cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements

strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature

is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning

units, replace with new units, and retest.





B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper

operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements

in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide protection against weather, rain, wind, storms, frost and heat so as to maintain all work

and materials free from injury or damage.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that

cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION




CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after

installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before

the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the

following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why

they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and

those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be

disrupted.





6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of

reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and

patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of

unsatisfactory work.


A. Cutting, boring, sawcutting or drilling through the new or existing structural elements to be done

only when so detailed in the drawings or accepted by the Architect and Structural Engineer with

the approval of DSA Representative.

B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their

load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

C. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased

maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in

a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to

perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety.

E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic

qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually

unsatisfactory manner.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing

warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.





1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to

be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during

cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage

to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting

to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering

and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.





3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-

core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable spec sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate

integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching

and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into

another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface

of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint

coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface

containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent

surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove

paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.


1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection

measures during construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes

packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or

selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,

reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation

for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another

facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation

into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for

salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work.





1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for the

Notice to Proceed.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three

copies of report. Include the following information:

1. Material category.

2. Generation point of waste.

3. Total quantity of waste in tons.

4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.

7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills

and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and

invoices.

D. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator.

E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery

was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date

refrigerant was recovered.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification

program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste

Management Coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of

containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and

disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.





1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and

cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure

throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated

by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each

type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,

address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location

on Project site where materials separation will be located.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling,

containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste

management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation,

termination, and removal requirements.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for

implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator

shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures,

as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal

return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum

interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that

are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.





2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust

and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for

recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate

recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they

are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at

each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if

found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining

trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.

5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of

accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

END OF SECTION





PUNCH-LIST FORM

PUNCH-LIST FORM Preliminary Punch-List.

Final Punch-List.

Project: From:

To: Date:

Item

No.

Room

No.

Area Description Completion

Date

A/E

Verification

End of Punch-List Form




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,


1. IOR’s Inspection procedures.

2. Warranties.

3. Extra Materials.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Title 24 Certificate of Acceptance requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IOR: Inspector of Record.

B. Inspection: IOR will inspect, not the Architect.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a copy of Title 24 Certificate of Acceptance forms submitted to enforcement agency.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting IOR’s inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the

list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar

releases.





5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,

damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. IOR’s Inspection: Submit a written request for IOR’s inspection for Substantial Completion. On

receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with IOR’s inspection process or notify

Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial

Completion after IOR’s inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list

or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate

will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final IOR’s inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed

or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list

shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. IOR’s Inspection: Submit a written request for final IOR’s inspection process for acceptance.

On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with IOR’s inspection process or notify

Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after

IOR’s inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected

before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.





1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,

if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use form

attached.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding

from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the

Work where commencement of warranties other than date specified in General Conditions.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

paper.

2. Include Table of Contents.

3. Identify content with specification section number and title.

4. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

5. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"

Project name, and name of Contractor.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver to Owner’s facility manager extra materials specified in each section.

B. Organize submitted materials in orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project

Manual.

1. Itemize each material and quantity in 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper.

C. Label each items for easy identification.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator

of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health

or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with

local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance

program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting IOR’s inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo

if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that

already show evidence of repair or restoration.





1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical

nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces

of diffusers, registers, and grills.

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction.

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with

requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.2 FORMS


1. Punch-List Form.

END OF SECTION




OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for

operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Other Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work

in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting

inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.

Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are

acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final

inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.





1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information

furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

6. Name and address of Architect.

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.





C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume

of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,

and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on

spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded

oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data

in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-

reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper

operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.

Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab

to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment

included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number

and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use

as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,

insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and

drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.





5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and

similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification

of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.





7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone

number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification

Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related

services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance

and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and

warranty and bond information, as described below.





B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance

and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources

of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section

"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM


Record Product Data is due no later than 10 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion.

Photocopy for continuation sheets. List products in order by specification section numbers.

Project Name: From:

To: Date:

Spec Section Originally Specified Actually Installed

No. Title Model Manufacturer Model Manufacturer

End of Record Product Data Form






BLANK PAGE





SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,

including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

3. Other Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in

those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit 1 copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract

modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record

Product Data.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and

Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether

individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up

Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Change Order Documents.

k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show

cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,

and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable

paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Architect.





e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable.

4. Assemble in single binder with table of contents.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record

Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean,





dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record

Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 FORMS


1. Record Product Data Form.

END OF SECTION




DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit 2 copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and

training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors'

names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit 1 complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction

time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation

of performance-based test.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,

and course content.




DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data

has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for

each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include

a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to

coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of

participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's

mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.

END OF SECTION




CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 1

SECTION 01 81 19

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Temporary construction ventilation, dust protection, preconditioning of materials,

protection of materials, sequencing, duct protection, and duct cleaning to insure good

indoor air quality after occupancy to be performed by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Related Sections:

1.2 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.

B. ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices

for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size (ANSI approved)

1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF RELEVANT MATERIALS

A. VOC-Emitting Materials

1. Section 06 16 43, Gypsum Sheathing

a. Adhesive applied on-site

2. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry


b. Composite wood products containing added urea-formaldehyde

3. Section 06 41 00, Architectural Wood Casework


b. Composite wood products containing added urea-formaldehyde

4. Section 07 13 53, Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing

a. Adhesives

b. Sealants

5. Section 07 25 00, Weather Barriers

a. Adhesives

b. Sealants

6. Section 07 84 00, Firestopping

a. All sealants, caulking, or spray materials.

7. Section 07 92 05, Joint Sealers

a. All joint sealers applied on-site on the interior side of the building envelope

8. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies

a. Adhesives





b. Sealants

9. Section 09 30 00, Tiling

a. Adhesives and joint sealers applied on-site on the interior side of the building

envelope

10. Section 09 65 13, Resilient Base

a. Adhesives

b. Sealants

11. Section 09 68 13, Tile Carpeting

a. Carpet

b. Adhesives

12. Section 09 00 00, Painting and Coatings

a. Painting

b. Coatings

13. Section 10 21 16, Shower and Dressing Compartments

a. Adhesives

b. Sealants

B. Porous and Fibrous Materials

1. Section 07 21 11, Thermal Installation

2. Batt insulation (exposed to interior only)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit eighteen (18) photographs documenting compliance with this Section. Provide six (6)

photographs each at three (3) different phases of construction.

B. Contractor shall develop and submit to the Architect for review the Construction Indoor Air

Quality (IAQ) Plan as required in this Section. A template form is provided Appendix A of this

Specification. The plan shall be submitted along with the first submittal for any of the products

listed above.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) requirements described below are based upon practices

described in SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995. Any

modifications to or substitutions of requirements described in this Section must comply with the

abovementioned SMACNA guideline.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Inspection: Contractor shall conduct inspections to confirm that construction IAQ measures

proposed in the Construction IAQ Plan are being followed, and be prepared to report compliance

with the Plan at progress meetings.

3.2 PROJECT CONTITIONS

A. Air Filtration:

1. Systems designed with particle filters shall not be operated without filters in place.

Temporary construction filters shall have a minimum MERV rating of 8.

2. Replace all air filtration media immediately prior to occupancy. Post-construction air filters

shall have a minimum MERV rating of 13.

B. Construction Ventilation: Following building enclosure, maintain continuous temporary

ventilation of areas during installation of voe-Emitting Materials identified in paragraph 1.04 of

this Section. Construction Ventilation shall be provided for post-occupancy touch-up work

involving VOC-Emitting materials. It is not required during Building Flush-Out.

1. Ventilation shall be supplied via open windows and doors, temporary ducts, and temporary

fans, sufficient to provide no less than three (3) air changes per hour.

2. When continuous ventilation is not practical via temporary fans and exhaust to outside,

then ventilation shall be supplied via the building's HVAC system and shall comply with

the following requirements:

a. Provide temporary air filters at return air grilles.

b. Provide 100% outside air. Relative humidity not to exceed 60%.

c. Provide a minimum of three {3) air changes per hour.

3. Maintain continuous ventilation for a minimum period of 72 hours after installation of

VOC-Emitting Materials, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in these Specifications.

4. Ventilate areas directly to outside; ventilation to other enclosed areas is not acceptable.

C. Preconditioning: Prior to installation, allow contractor-furnished contractor-installed VOC-

Emitting Furnishings and Equipment as identified in paragraph 1.04 of this Section to off-gas in

dry, well-ventilated space for 14 calendar days to allow for reasonable dissipation of odors and

emissions

1. Remove containers and packaging to maximize off-gassing of VOCs.

2. Precondition products in ventilated warehouse or other ventilated building.

Preconditioning at the project site is acceptable, provided that Temporary Construction

Ventilation and Sequencing measures are taken as described elsewhere in this

Specification.





3. Products requiring preconditioning include, at minimum, contractor-furnished and

contractor-installed VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment that contain vinyl or other

flexible plastics, resins, adhesives, foam rubber, and fiberboards with urea-formaldehyde

binders. Products bearing Greenguard certification (www.greenguard.org) shall be

excluded from the preconditioning requirement.

3.3 SEQUENCING

A. On-Site Application: Where voe-Emitting Materials as identified in paragraph 1.03 of this

Specification are applied on-site, apply prior to installation of Porous and Fibrous Materials as

identified in paragraph 1.04 of this Specification. Maintain continuous ventilation for a period of

72 hours before installation of porous and fibrous materials.

1. Where this sequencing requirement is not possible, protect porous materials with

polyethylene vapor retarders. Tape all polyethylene edges to insure a complete seal.

Maintain continuous ventilation per temporary construction ventilation requirements

described above for a period of 72 hours before removing polyethylene.

B. Completion: Complete interior finish material installation prior to Building Flush-Out as

described in paragraph 3.06 of this Section.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Moisture Protection: Protect interior materials from water intrusion or penetration as described in

Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements.

1. Porous or fibrous materials with visible microbial growth shall not be installed.

2. Non-porous materials with visible microbial growth shall be decontaminated.

B. Duct Protection: during dust-producing activities (e.g. sanding, cutting, or grinding), or when

VOC-Emitting Materials (as described in paragraph 1.04 above} are being installed, implement

the following measures:

1. If possible, damper off the return (negative pressure) side of HVAC air distribution system

and seal return system openings with polyethylene sheet.

2. If HVAC system must be operated during dust-producing activities, provide temporary

construction air filters with a minimum MERV rating of 8 at all return air grilles.

3. If HVAC supply air is off, protect diffusers and openings with polyethylene sheet.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Provide the following cleaning in addition to requirements described in Section 01 70 00

Execution Requirements:

1. Clean all coils, air filters, and fans prior to Testing and Balancing.

2. If significant dust collection is observed at diffusers, return air grilles, or in ducts, clean

prior to system start-up.





3.6 BUILD FLUSH-OUT

A. Just prior to Substantial Completion, but following Testing and Balancing, flush out building

using the building HVAC system, maintaining a minimum temperature of 60° F and maximum

60% relative humidity. Provide a total of 14,000 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor

area building flush out as follows:

1. Prior to building occupancy, provide 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor

area.

2. Following building occupancy, provide a minimum ventilation rate of 0.30 cfm/sq. ft. of

outside air or the design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. Maintain these

conditions beginning a minimum of three (3} hours prior to daily occupancy and extending

through daily occupancy hours, until the remainder of the 14,000 cfm of outside air per

square foot of floor area is achieved.

B. Insure that MERV 13 air filters are in place during Building Flush-Out.

C. Installation of furniture and equipment may occur during Building Flush-Out.

D. Return ventilation system to normal operation following Building Flush-Out period to minimize

energy consumption.

E. Immediately following Building Flush-Out, replace air filters with new MERV 13 air filters.

Air filters that handle solely outside air need not be replaced.

END OF SECTION





APPENDIX A

CONSTUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) PLAN

CONTRACTOR [CONSTUCTION MANAGER]:

Name: Title:

Telephone: Fax:

Email:

I have read and understood and will implement the following Construction IAQ Plan:

Signature Date:

1. CONSTRUCTION VENTILATION

List all project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Specification Section 01 81 19.

Attach additional sheet if necessary.

Y / N

Ventilation will be supplied via open windows, temporary ducts, and

temporary fans. If "Y", then supply air diffusers, return air grilles, and/or

open ducts will be sealed.

Y / N

Ventilation will be supplied via area exhaust fans. If "Y", check applica-

ble:

□ Supply air diffusers, return air grilles, and/or open ducts will

be sealed. Make-up air will be provided through open win-

dows or doors or other transfer air devices.

□ HVAC system will provide make-up air. Return air grilles

will be sealed.

Y / N

Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. If "Y", check

applicable:

□ Return air grilles are sealed. Exhaust is provided via open

windows or doors.

□ Return air grilles are used for exhaust. HVAC will provide 100%

outside air. Air filters with a minimum MERV rating of 8 will be

provided at return air grilles.

□ Required Areas will be ventilated directly to outside. No ventilated air will be

returned.

□ Required Ventilation will provide no less than three air changes per hour.





□ Required Ventilation will be continuous for a period no less than 72 hours after

completion of installation.

□ Required All filtration used during Construction Ventilation will be replaced prior to

Substantial Completion.

2. PRECONDITIONING



Y / N

Preconditioning will occur in dry and well-ventilated offsite location.

If "Y":

Where is the offsite location?

Y / N

Preconditioning will occur onsite. If "Y", check applicable:

□ Ventilation will be supplied via open windows, temporary ducts,

and temporary fans. See l.2a above.

□ Ventilation will be supplied via area exhaust fans. See l.2b

above.

□ Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. See

l.2c above.

□ Required Containers and packaging will be removed prior to Preconditioning.

□ Required Preconditioning will occur for fourteen (14) continuous days prior to

installation.

3. SEQUENCING



□ Required

Previously installed Porous or Fibrous Materials located in a room where

VOC- Emitting Materials are to be installed will be protected with

polyethylene vapor retarder. Polyethylene will not be removed until

completion of a 72-hour ventilation period.

□ Required Installation of interior finish materials will complete fourteen (14)

days prior to Substantial Completion.

4. PROTECTION







□ Required Porous or Fibrous Materials with visible microbial growth shall not be

installed.

□ Required Materials that are not defined as Porous or Fibrous with visible mi-

crobial growth shall be decontaminated prior to installation.

□ Required

Temporary ventilation will be provided during all dust producing

activities. See Item I Construction Ventilation above. All supply air

diffusers and return air grilles will be covered.

□ Required Ducts will be sealed during transportation, delivery, and construction.

END OF APPENDIX A




NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 1

SECTION 01 81 23

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section is the primary source of requirements for noise and vibration control in the

project documents. Should conflicts arise between the requirements in these sections and

other portions of the contract documents, the requirements in these sections shall take

precedence unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Under no circumstances,

however, shall the requirements in these sections take precedence over code or life safety

requirements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A.

1.3 REQUIRMENTS

A. Objectionable noise and vibration caused by building systems shall be reduced to levels

as close as possible to the maximum allowable noise and vibration criteria required in this

section. All necessary adjustments and retesting of equipment and systems to achieve the

criteria shall be provided at no cost to the Owner.

1.4 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE NOISE CRITERIA FOR PROJECT SPACES

A. Maximum allowable background noise levels in project spaces due to operation of

HVAC, plumbing or electrical equipment are listed below.

Spaces Required Background Noise Level

Sleeping Rooms 30

Office Area 40

Restrooms, Storage 45

Corridor, Laundry 50

B. Should the noise levels in any room exceed the above criteria, the Contractor shall be

responsible for rebalancing, adjusting, or retesting required to meet the criteria, at no

additional cost to the Owner.

1.5 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE VIBRATION CRITERIA FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

A. Rotating devices shall be balanced according to the schedule below. The following

vibration displacement levels shall not be exceeded when the equipment is rigidly





grounded to structure (with the isolators blocked or "grounded out.")

Equipment Type RPM mils peak to peak (max)

Fans < 600 4

600 to 999 3

1000 to 2000 2

> 2000 1

Pumps 1800 2

3600 1

B. Should any rotating equipment cause vibration exceeding the above criteria (or

manufacturer’s specifications), the Contractor shall be responsible for rebalancing,

realignment, adjusting, or retesting required to meet the criteria, at no additional cost to

the Owner.

1.6 SOUND POWER LIMITS FOR AIRHANDLING EQUIPMENT

A. The sound generating characteristics of air handling units shall be tested to, and comply

with, all requirements of this specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to

tests in accordance with applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such

compliance. A special test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has

previous certified test results that can be made applicable to this project.

B. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed air handling units have

been tested in accordance with the latest versions of AMCA Standard 300, Test Code for

Sound Rating, and AMCA Standard 301, Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings

from Laboratory Test Data.

C. Sound power levels for all air handling equipment shall not exceed the levels of the

equipment used as the basis of design for this project.

D. Should sound power levels exceed those used as basis of design, the Contractor shall

arrange and pay for remedial noise control analysis, system redesign, and necessary

additional noise control components at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.7 NOISE CONTROL FOR AIRHANDLING EQUIPMENT

A. Heavy Gauge Ductwork: 18 gauge ductwork shall be provided near air handlers in

locations shown and as scheduled in the Project Documents.

B. Duct and Plenum Lining:

1. 2”-thick lining shall be provided in ductwork and plenums near air handling

equipment in locations shown and as scheduled in the Project Documents.





2. 1”-thick lined ductwork shall be provided in all indoor SA and RA ductwork,

except where 2” lining or acoustical flexible duct is scheduled.

3. Minimum 5’ long, 1” thick lined runouts or acoustical flexible duct shall be

provided between dampers and SA outlets or RA intakes in all project spaces

rated at NC-35 or below.

C. Turning Vanes: Turning vanes shall be provided in initial elbows in SA and RA mains

for all airhandling equipment.

1.8 NOISE CONTROL FOR GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. Noise generation from grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be comply with all

requirements of this specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to tests in

accordance with applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such

compliance. A special test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has certified

test results for proposed products.

B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:

1. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed products have

been tested in accordance with latest editions of ASHRAE Standard 70 and ADC

Standard 1062:GRD-84 and meet the maximum allowable noise criteria (NC)

and A-level requirements specified above. Alternate test standards may be

substituted for the above if approved in advance by the Architect.

2. Submit a tabulation of proposed products, maximum allowable noise criteria, and

product noise criteria (at specified air volumes) for all project spaces.

1.9 NOISE CONTROL FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS

A. Noise levels emanating from specified lighting equipment shall not exceed the maximum

noise level requirements of this specification. A special test for this project is not

required if the manufacturer has previous experience with similar installations.

B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:

1. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed products have

been tested for suitable operation in Project spaces with specified maximum

noise criteria (NC) requirements.

2. Submittals shall include a tabulation of proposed products, identification of Project

spaces where proposed products are to be installed, maximum allowable NC for all

Project spaces, and product NC for all Project spaces.

1.10 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Vibration or noise from HVAC equipment and systems shall not be transmitted to

building structure or components, including, but not limited to, roofs, floors, beams,

columns, walls, partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing and suspension systems.





1. Furnish all labor, equipment, and components necessary for HVAC equipment

and system vibration control, including, but not limited to vibration isolators,

bases, seismic restraints, incidental equipment, and related materials. Assure that

deflection, stability and seismic restraint requirements are met. Install, test, and

adjust all vibration isolation equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Isolator and spring static deflections are based on typical, anticipated equipment

characteristics, particularly rpm. The Manufacturer shall evaluate the equipment

and propose appropriate or alternate static deflections as necessary.

3. The Manufacturer shall be responsible for all vibration isolation and seismic

control equipment and have no less than five years’ experience in fabrication and

delivery of such equipment.

4. The seismic resistance capability of all equipment shall be certified by a

registered professional engineer in the state in which the project resides. The

requirements of all applicable codes shall be met.

B. Insure that functional integrity, structural integrity, and warrantees of HVAC equipment

and systems are not compromised by installation of vibration isolation equipment.

C. Satisfy the requirements of all applicable codes.

D. The vibration isolation equipment Manufacturer’s responsibilities shall include the

following.

1. Provide written installation instructions to the Contractor.

2. Provide necessary visits to the jobsite before and after equipment is installed to

identify pre-installation issues and post-installation discrepancies and necessary

corrective work.

E. The Contractor’s responsibilities shall include the following.

1. Rigorously avoid short-circuiting of vibration-isolated HVAC equipment and

systems to building structure and components. Oversee all trades to prevent the

short-circuiting of any vibration isolation system and bring conflicts to the

Architect's attention.

2. Remove temporary blocking washers and shims after equipment installations are

complete and HVAC equipment and systems are at operation weight.

3. Obtain "rough-in" and final inspections by the Manufacturer and/or Architect

prior to any permanent closure or covering.

4. All installations that are deemed defective in workmanship or materials by the

Manufacturer and/or Architect shall be corrected at no additional cost to the

Owner.

F. Submittals by the Manufacturer shall include the following:





1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures, including

written instructions and checklists to be delivered to the Contractor to aid in

proper installation of manufacturer's equipment.

2. A schedule indicating tag number, location and type of all vibration isolators.

This shall be sufficiently clear to suffice as a checklist and index for design load,

static deflection expected under the design load, specified minimum static

deflection, additional deflection to solid under design load, ratio of spring height

to spring diameter under design load.

3. Shop drawings of seismic restraints, steel brackets, steel rails, steel base frames,

and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, and vibration

isolator and seismic restraint mounting attachment methods.

4. Calculations by a structural engineer licensed in California, certifying that all

seismic restraints, bolts, cables and associated components will conform with all

applicable code requirements.

5. A list of any contract discrepancies or field conditions which might limit the

performance of vibration isolation equipment and components.

G. Submittals by the Contractor (at project completion) shall include the following:

1. A complete tabulation showing for each vibration isolator: (a) the actual static

deflection measured at the project and (b) the specified minimum static

deflection. Assistance from the vibration isolation equipment Manufacturer may

be required.

2. A report certifying a) that each piece of rotating mechanical equipment does not

exceed the maximum displacement levels required in this section.

H. Vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall be provided at all vibration-

producing equipment, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

1. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Equipment: Specific vibration isolation

and seismic control equipment includes, but is not limited to equipment described

in this section. Vibration isolation listed in mechanical drawings and schedules

shall not supersede this section, unless directed by the Architect.

2. Vibration-Producing Equipment: Vibration-producing equipment includes, but is

not limited to, all HVAC equipment with rotating or moving parts, including air

handling equipment, condensing equipment, exhaust fans, boilers, pumps,

chillers, transformers, dimmer racks, etc.

1.11 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Vibration or noise from plumbing or HVAC piping shall not be transmitted to building

structure and components, including, but is not limited to roofs, floors, beams, columns,

walls, partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing and suspension systems.





B. Vibration isolation shall be provided at all active piping systems, unless otherwise

directed by the Architect. Specific vibration isolation equipment includes, but is not

limited to equipment described in this section, and plumbing drawings and schedules for

vibration isolation do not supersede this section.

C. Insure that functional integrity, structural integrity, and manufacturers warrantees for

piping systems are not compromised by installation of vibration isolation equipment.

D. Satisfy the requirements of all applicable codes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT AND PLENUM LINER

A. The sound absorbing characteristics of duct and plenum lining shall comply with this

specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to tests in accordance with

applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such compliance. A special

test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has certified test results for proposed

products.

B. Submittals shall include octave band absorption coefficients and NRC values for specified

thicknesses and densities of lining determined in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM C 423 in an F-25 Mounting configuration. Submittals shall also include, but shall

not be limited to, a complete description of the tested material and the test conditions,

methods, and procedures.

C. All sound absorption measurements and calculations shall be made in complete

conformance with the latest revision of ASTM C 423, Test Method for Sound Absorption

and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method, and ASTM E795,

Standard Practice for Mounting Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests. Test

specimens shall be tested in an F-25 Mounting configuration. Tests shall be conducted by a

laboratory that is accredited under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation

Program (NVLAP) to conduct the test.

D. Duct or plenum lining at specified thicknesses and densities shall have the following

minimum octave band sound absorption coefficients when tested in the F-25 Mounting

configuration in accordance with ASTM E 795:

Octave Band Ctr. Frequency in Hertz

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

1"-thick, 2.0pcf: .15 .50 .55 .80 .85 .95

2"-thick, 2.0pcf .25 .75 .90 .95 .95 .95

2.3 ACOUSTICAL FLEXIBLE DUCT





A. Flexible insulated round duct, with sound-transparent inner liner constructed of spun-

bonded nylon.

B. Must comply with all applicable codes and UL requirements.

2.4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Equipment: Vibration isolation and seismic

control equipment shall include but is not limited to the following:

1. Neoprene Pads (with Appropriate Isolation Washers and Bolts): Minimum 0.1”

deflection "Super W" by Mason or approved equal.

2. Neoprene Isolator (with Integral Seismic Restraint): Minimum 0.2” deflection

"BR" by Mason or approved equal.

3. Steel Spring Isolator (with Integral Seismic Restraint): Minimum 2” deflection

"SSLFH" by Mason, "FYS" by Peabody or approved equal. Springs internal to

air handling units shall meet the same stability and deflection requirements as

provided by SSLFH, FYS, or equal.

4. Neoprene Isolation Hanger: Minimum 0.2” deflection "BRD" by A/B, "HD" by

Mason, "RH" by Peabody or approved equal.

5. Steel Spring Isolation Hanger: Minimum 1” deflection "30" by Mason or

approved equal.

6. Rooftop Spring Curb: Min. 2” deflection CMAB by Mason or approved equal.

7. Flexible Pipe Connectors: "MFTNC, MFNEC or MFTFU" by Mason or

approved equal.

8. Flexible Duct Connectors: "KNC-100B" by Peabody or equal.

9. Flexible Electrical Connection: Flexible conduit installed grossly slack.

10. Field-Fabricated Resilient/Airtight Sleeve: Oversized sleeve around pipe,

conduit, or duct penetration. 1” clearance all around penetrating element, packed

with glass fiber and sealed with at least 1/2” deep bead of acoustical sealant.

B. Warrantees: All vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall be warranted

against defective workmanship, operation and materials for the life of the equipment

supported by these items.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 NOISE MEASUREMENTS

For all spaces listed in Paragraph 1.2, building system noise measurements shall be made as

follows, as part of the project TAB measurement, adjustment, and reporting requirements:





A. Noise levels shall be quantified in all project spaces and compared with the specified

maximum allowable Background Noise Criteria (NC) as part of the testing, adjusting and

balancing process. Insofar as possible under the jurisdiction of the Air Balance Contractor

and the Mechanical Contractor, adjustments shall be made to air handling equipment to

insure that maximum NC are not exceeded in any project space.

B. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Proposed test procedure and measurement equipment before beginning work.

2. Final air balance report, including tabulation of reject space by room number,

specified maximum NC, measured NC at each measurement location, octave band

sound levels in dB from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz plotted on NC curves at each

measurement location, and notes relating to additionally encountered noise sources

(other than HVAC).

C. The same Air Balance Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of air balancing

including all sound level measurements. The Air Balance Contractor shall have successful

experience in air balancing and sound level measurements including no less than five years’

experience on projects equal to the size and complexity of this work.

D. Measurement equipment shall be recently-calibrated Type 1 Sound Level Meter with Class

II Octave Band Filters and 1/2" random-incidence microphone.

E. The procedure for noise measurements shall be as follows:

1. Sound pressure level measurements shall be made at 5' above floor level in the

center of each project space in all octave bands centered between 63 Hz and 8000

Hz, inclusive. Measured levels shall be recorded in decibels (re .0002 microbar) on

paper in tabular form and plotted against NC curves for the record. Testing shall

be accomplished only during periods when no other trades are working within the

building outside noises are at a minimum. Make note of and record on paper all

noise sources which cannot be removed, such sources might include electrical,

lighting, and plumbing systems.

2. Rebalance or adjust all air handling equipment causing noise in spaces in excess of

maximum allowable NC. Re-measure sound levels in all such spaces to show

compliance with maximum allowable NC. Repeat until noise is minimized to the

satisfaction of the Architect, Mechanical Engineer, and Acoustical Consultant.

3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

A. After each equipment unit installation is complete and under full operational load,

vibration isolators shall be adjusted so that loads are transferred to them and away from

temporary blocking washers and shims. Blocks and shims then shall be removed and

used as gauges to judge required clearances. Washers shall be moved away.

B. Inspect all vibration-isolated equipment, coordinate the work of all involved trades, and

see that vibration isolators are not short-circuited by seismic restraints, drain lines,





conduits, stanchions, control tubing, duct connections, pipe connections, etc. Ensure that

hanger isolators and their rods or wires do not touch any other building component.

C. Obtain "rough-in" inspection and approval from the Architect of any installation to be

covered or enclosed, prior to such closure.

D. Schedule final inspection(s) by the equipment Manufacturer after installation as needed.

Obtain "rough-in" inspection by the Manufacturer of any installation to be covered or

enclosed, prior to such closure.

END OF SECTION


DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 1

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Building envelope and interior demolition as denoted in construction documents, inclusive of coordination, abatement and removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances disturbed in the course of completing the project’s overall scope of work.


A. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 29 CFR 1926 – U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

B. NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

C. 2016 California Codes for demolition Work, safety of structure, electrical disconnection and reconnection dust control and disposal

D. 2016 California Fire Code (CFC), California Code of Regulations, (CCR) Title 24, Part 9, Chapter 33 - Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and

construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.



B. Obtain required permits from authorities.

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting Work and comply with their requirements.

D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits.

E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without prior written notice to the Owner.

F. Conform to procedures applicable when existing hazardous or contaminated materials are disturbed.

PART 2 - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCOPE

A. Hazardous Materials: It is anticipated that hazardous materials will be encountered to complete the Project Scope of Work. When the hazardous materials, as described in Exhibit A, to be disturbed: 1. Notify the City of Glendale’s project representative, the Architect and applicable

regulatory authorities that work will commence in the affected areas, a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior.

2. After notifying that work will commence in the affected areas, proceed with the abatement and the removal of the hazardous materials by conforming to 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.

3. Removal of the hazardous materials must be completed by a qualified and experienced hazmat abatement and removal company.

B. Verify that the abatement and the removal of hazardous materials remediation is complete.

C. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work.

D. Remove opening metal frames, doors, and glazing as required to accomplish new work.

E. Remove portions of building envelope as required to accomplish new work

F. Remove interior partitions, fixtures, finishes and equipment as required to accomplish new work.

G. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling.

3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with other requirements specified in Division 01.



B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits if applicable. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the

public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City of Glendale.

D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.

E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and City of Glendale; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.

H. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.

I. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection

point or point of reuse.

J. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.



3.3 EXISTING UTILITES

A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.

D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City of Glendale.

E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City of Glendale.

F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities.

H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain.

3.4 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management.

C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION




CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Provide concrete formwork for all cast-in-place concrete.


A. Section 03 2000 - Reinforcing Steel.

B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by the

following organizations applies to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the

reference.

ACI American Concrete Institute

PS U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standards

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WWPA Western Wood Products Association

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to requirements of

2016 CBC and the following Publications.

ACI 347 - Standard Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

B. Complete concrete elements to conform to required shape, line and dimensions. Include all

possible loading conditions in the design of formwork and shoring. Ensure all applicable





safety laws are strictly enforced and maintain a safe construction Project.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of

governing authorities having jurisdiction.

Chapter 19 of the 2016 California Building Code including all Applicable State of California

Amendments (CBC).

1. Article 1.05 Design Requirements of this Section 03 1000.

B. Construction and maintenance of all concrete formwork shall be under the continuous

supervision of a foreman with not less than 3 years of successful experience in the forming and

the removal of forms for architectural quality work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver and store all forms and materials above ground in a manner to protect them from

damage, contamination and deterioration.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work of other Sections and Divisions shown to be incorporated into concrete

elements. Work of others shown passing through footings and concrete walls are only allowed

if detailed on the Structural Drawings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIAL

A. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will not be exposed in the

finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material.

1. Lumber: Standard or better grade Douglas Fir, meeting the requirements of WCLIB

“Standard Grading Rules No. 16" or WWPA “Western Lumber Grading Rules 88. Use

boards which are surfaced on at least 2 edges and one side for a tight fit.





2. Plywood: B-B Plyform, Class I, exterior grade meeting the requirements of PS 1, 5/8-

inch minimum thickness for 12 inch stud spacing and 3/4-inch minimum thickness for 16

inch stud spacing.

B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with

plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to

provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to

minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand

pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection.

C. Framing, Studding and Bracing: “Standard” or “Construction” grade Douglas Fir, S4S,

meeting the requirements of the WCLIB “Standard Grading Rules No. 16” or WWPA

“Western Lumber Grading Rules 88.”

D. Form Coating: Non-grain raising and non-staining type that will not leave residual matter on

surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of subsequent application of other

material applied to concrete surface. Coatings containing mineral oils or other nondrying

ingredients will not be permitted. Form coating for use with form liners shall be of type

recommended by form liner manufacturer.

E. Nails: Common wire, steel.

F. Waterstop: 3/16" thick, ribbed, PVC waterstop by Greenstreak or approved equal.

2.2 TIES AND SPREADERS

A. Form Ties and Spreaders: Standard metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders

and leaving no metal within 1 inch of concrete surfaces. Inner tie rod shall be left in concrete

when forms are removed. Wire ties or wood spreaders will not be permitted. Form ties shall

be a type which does not leave an open hole through the concrete and which permits neat and

solid patching at every hole.


3.1 ERECTION

A. Concrete below grade may be placed directly against earth in open trenches. Side forms for

footings may be of earth provided the soil will stand without caving and the side of the banks

are made with neat cuts to minimum dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

B. Where footing excavations exceed widths and lengths shown on the Drawings, extend

formwork to bottom of excavation.

C. Make all necessary provisions to prevent cave-ins during the placement of concrete.





D. All forms shall be constructed true to line and level, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of

mortar, and shall conform per ACI Standards, to the dimensions of the finished concrete as

shown on the Drawings. Finished concrete surfaces shall show no visible signs of bow or

deflection.

E. Wooden supports or spreaders for forms shall not extend into concrete pours.

F. Set and secure all required steel assemblies, angles, pipe sleeves, bolts, inserts, and other such

items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.

G. Construct all forms straight, true, plumb, and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in

200 and a tolerance vertically of one in 500.

H. Keep forms sufficiently wetted to prevent joints opening up before concrete is placed.

I. Bracing:

1. Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain position and shape and to

ensure safety of personnel.

2. Construct all bracing, supporting members and centering of ample size and strength to

safely carry, without excessive deflections, all dead and live loads to which they may be

subjected.

3. Properly space the forms apart and securely tie them together using metal spreader ties

that give positive tying and accurate spreading.

3.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to safely

sustain its own weight and superimposed loads above. After concrete is placed, a minimum

time period of ten days shall elapse before the removal of forms can be considered.

1. Forms for at grade concrete may be removed in 24 hours providing removal does not

damage surfaces and edges of concrete.

B. Use all means necessary to protect workers, passers by, the installed Work of other trades, and

the complete safety of the structure.

C. Cut nail and tie wires or form ties off flush, and level all surfaces smooth and clean.

D. Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping off inside the wall

surfaces and patching up the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas.

E. Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreaders, rods and sleeve nuts, using water, and then

solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure by means

of a grouting gun; grout shall be one part Portland cement to 2.5 parts sand; apply grout

immediately after removing forms.

Section continued on next page





3.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE

A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution product is

being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions” for Substitution

requests.

Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included.

Initials Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included

____________ All submitted products are as specified.

B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:

________ 1. Qualifications (relevant experience) of foreman.

END OF SECTION 03 1000




REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00 - REINFORCING STEEL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.


A. Furnish, fabricate and install all reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete as

necessary to complete all reinforced concrete work.

B. Furnish and fabricate reinforcing steel only for masonry construction.


A. Section 03 2000 – Reinforcing Steel

B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by

the following organizations apply to the Work only to the extent specified by the

reference.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials


AWS American Welding Society

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CBC STDS 2016 California Building Code Standards





1.5 SUBMITTALS



B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for

required submittals.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in accordance with applicable requirements of


1. Chapters 19 and 21 of the 2016 California Building Code.

B. Provide mill Reports for all types and sizes of reinforcing steel for review and

acceptance prior to fabrication and transporting reinforcing steel to the construction

site.

1. Mill reports shall contain the steel source, description, heat number, yield point,

ultimate tensile strength, elongation percentage, bend test and chemical analysis.

a. If the reports show that material is satisfactory no tests will be required.

b. For foreign steel, testing as specified below will be required by a testing

laboratory acceptable to the Architect and Building Department.

c. Certification from any other sources will not be acceptable.

2. Ensure that the material delivered for use is that represented by the mill reports

and obtain copies of mill reports, examine them, certify whether the material

represented complies with Specifications requirements, and make distribution of

reports as required. Report chemical composition of each heat, as determined by

ladle analysis.

3. Where materials proposed for use cannot be identified, the Owner shall pay for an

approved testing laboratory to make one series of tests (tensile and bend) from

each 2.5 tons, or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel.

Include 2 samples, minimum, of sufficient length to allow tests to be made on the

as-rolled bar. The Owner shall then back-charge the Contractor for all testing

fees.

C. Contact Architect for observation of all concrete reinforcing.

D. Testing and Inspections shall comply with Section 014100 and as noted in the Contract

Documents.






A. Bundle reinforcing steel and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and

placing in accordance to the placement drawings.

B. Store above ground, in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt,

grease, and other bond breaking coatings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work of other Sections and Divisions shown to be incorporated into

concrete elements. Work of others shown passing through footings and concrete walls

are only allowed if detailed on the Structural Drawings.

B. Coordinate placement locations of all masonry dowels with Section 04 2000 whenever

they are required to be embedded in cast-in-concrete.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new, free from rust and mill scale. Reinforcing bars shall

comply with ASTM A 615:

Grade 60 for all bars .

B. Reinforcing bars shown welded on the Drawings and welded in the field shall be new

material, free from rust and mill scale, conforming to ASTM A 706, Grade 60 for all

sizes.

C. Tie Wire: 16 gage, annealed conforming to ASTM A 82.

D. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1 or Grade E70XX for welding Grade 60, ASTM A

706 bars.

2.2 SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCING BARS

A. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers, concrete block

and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place.






3.1 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Bend all bars cold. Comply with ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.3.

2. Do not use bars with kinks or bend not shown on the Drawings.

3. Make bends for stirrups and ties in accordance with details on the Drawings.

B. Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice,

ACI” SP-66 and ACI 318-14.

C. Welding of ASTM A 706 reinforcing shall conform to ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.4.

3.2 PLACING

B.A. General: Before commencing with concrete placement, accurately place all concrete

reinforcing steel including dowels for masonry. Secure in place and provide positive

support using concrete block, metal chairs or spacers, or by metal hangers. Set tie-wire

ends directed into concrete, away from formed exposed concrete surfaces. Comply

with ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.2.

1. Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the latest

edition of the CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice”.

B. Clearance:

1. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one times the nominal diameter

of reinforcing, but not less than 1.33 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate,

nor less than 1 inch.

2. Provide minimum concrete coverage for reinforcing as noted in the General Notes

shown on Drawings. Minimum concrete coverage dimensions also applies to tie

wires.

C. Splicing:

1. Horizontal and vertical bars:

a. Place bars with minimum lap at splices to develop the strength of the bar.

b. Bars may be wired together at laps.

c. Whenever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars.

d. Splice bars a minimum as shown on the Drawings.

e. Clear spacing to be the same as Section 3.2B(1) above.





3.3 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT

A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free from rust, loose mill

scale, oil, paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce bond between steel

and concrete, and between steel and grout. Comply with ACI 318-14, Section

26.6.1.2.







A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution

product is being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions”

for Substitution requests.


Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included.

Initials

____________ All submitted products are as specified.


_________ 1. Mill certificates for each size and grade of steel intended for use in

the Project, stating physical and chemical properties and

compliance with ASTM requirements.

_________ 2. Placement sheets and related details. Indicate sizes, fabricated

shapes, dimensions, spacing, material, grade and locations within

concrete and masonry Work.

3. Epoxy adhesive.





CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 – GENERAL





A. Provide finish, cure, repair, protect and clean (where exposed) all cast-in-place concrete

required for foundations, starter walls, slabs-on-grade, and other concrete indicated.

B. Provide moisture barriers, granular subbase and sand cover for moisture barrier located below

concrete slabs cast-on-grade.


A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03 2000 - Reinforcing Steel

1.4 REFERENCES


following organizations apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the

reference.


ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials


1.5 SUBMITTALS










A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing


1. Chapter 19 of the 2016 California Building Code including all applicable State of

California Amendments (CBC).

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

4. ACI Publication SP-15 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings with

selected ACI and ASTM references. All apply to the Work of this Section where

applicable.

B. Specified aggregates, cement, and color from single sources only.

C. Approved concrete mix designs shall not be altered without approval of the Architect.

D. Testing and Inspection: Shall comply with Special Inspection form D-103, Special Inspections

stated in structural drawings, and with the 2016 CBC except as modified below.

1. Contractor shall coordinate and provide access to all locations for specimen sampling and

inspection.

2. Contractor shall notify Project Inspector at least 48 hours prior to commencing

preparation for placement of concrete. Coordinate and provide access to all locations for

testing and inspection of Concrete Work.

E. Contractor and tradesmen constructing forms, placing and curing Architectural concrete for

walls, columns and piers shall have at least five years of successful experience in this work.

Provide experience records and references to Architect immediately upon receiving notice to

proceed.

F. Concrete must have a Floor Flatness, Ff, of at least 50 with a minimum of 35. Concrete must

have a Floor Levelness, Fl, of at least 40.


A. Deliver and store all materials in a manner to protect them from damage, contamination and

deterioration.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with Divisions 12, 14, 22, 26 and other Divisions requiring items of their Work to

be embedded into cast-in-place concrete.





B. Notify Architect and Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours prior to each commencement of

concrete placement and before forms are closed-in.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II

B. Course and Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33

C. Water: Clean and not be detrimental to concrete

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. Chemical: Water Reducing per ASTM C 494, Type A

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion

B. Vapor Barrier: Class A conforming to ASTM Standard E 1745-11.

C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water

reducing and plasticzing agents, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of

5,000 psi within 28 days.

D. Concrete Adhesive: “SET-XP” Adhesive by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Hilti (Hilti

“HIT-RE 500-V3”), or approved equal.

E. Curing compound:

1. Liquid membrane-forming compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1 (1D), Class B,

guaranteed not to affect the appearance of the concrete surfaces, and the bond, adhesion,

or effectiveness of finishes and surface treatment specified herein to be applied to

concrete.

2. Curing compound used on exposed concrete surfaces shall be non-discoloring, fast drying

and shall be conclusively demonstrated not to darken or yellow with age.

3. Curing compound for use on concrete floors to receive adhered covering shall be

specially formulated for such use and shall be certified by the manufacturer not to inhibit





the bonding qualities of flooring adhesives.

2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Closed cell polyvinyl chloride form, resilient, recovery of 95 percent if not compressed more

than 50 percent of original thickness.

B. Construction Joint Devices: Non-metallic tongue and groove profile.

C. Sealants and primers: As specified in Section 07 9000.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Submit concrete mix design(s) prepared by a testing laboratory, designed by a registered civil

or structural engineer, and approved by Architect review and acceptance, prior to delivery of

concrete to site.

1. Provide cast-in-concrete to meet the following:

a. Normal (Stone) weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301, except as noted below

b. Minimum 28-day compressive strength:

1. Slab-on-grade & footings: 2,500 psi

c. Maximum water-cement ratio:

1. Slab-on-grade & footings: 0.45

2. Footings: 0.45

3. Retaining walls: 0.45

4. Caisson: 0.45

d. Slump: 4" (plus or minus 1 inch) unless noted otherwise.

e. Fly Ash - (up to a maximum of 18% of cement content by volume).

f. Coarse aggregate to be Santa Margarita Granite Aggregate, San Gabriel Aggregate,

Heavy-Media Processed; or other clean coarse aggregate of lower or equal

reactivity.

g. Fine aggregate from Santa Margarita Granite Aggregate, Moorpark Source, or other

clean fine aggregate of lower or equal reactivity.

h. Calcium chloride not allowed.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM

C 94 and furnish batch ticket information.

2.6 SUBBASE BELOW CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND SLABS-ON-GRADE:

A. Clean, free draining Santa Margarita Granite sand, Moorpark Source, or those pre-approved

non-reactive fine aggregate.






3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify requirements for minimum concrete cover over reinforcement.

B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are

accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing Work, drill holes in existing concrete,

insert steel dowels and fill solid with concrete adhesive.

C. Coordinate the placement of joist devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement

of form accessories.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318-14 Section 26.5.2, and ACI Publication SP 15.

B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction

joints.

C. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.

D. Place slabs in checkerboard pattern as indicated.

E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are

not disturbed during concrete placement.

F. Maintain legible copies of all transit mixed trip tickets signed by a certified weight master and

records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test

samples taken for each load delivered to site.

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Provide smooth rubbed finish for exposed interior concrete walls.





B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

1. Steel trowel surfaces for all interior slabs unless noted otherwise.

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold

temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Cure floor surfaces with two (2) coats of spray applied curing compound in accordance with

ACI 308.

D. Curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 318–14 Section 26.5.3.

3.6 PATCHING

A. Notify Architect and Project Inspector to review concrete surfaces immediately upon removal

of forms.

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete in not acceptable. Notify Architect

upon discovery.

C. Patch imperfections as directed.

3.7 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective Concrete Definition: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details,

dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect.

C. Do not patch, fill, tough-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon approval of

Architect for each individual area.

3.8 TESTS & INSPECTIONS

A. Tests and inspections shall comply with Section 01 4100 of these specifications.









requests.

Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included. Attach a letter

of explanation for each submittal not included.

Initials

________ All submitted products are as specified.


______ 1. Product Data:

a. Concrete Aggregates

b. Cement

c. Admixtures

d. Integral Colors

e. Curing materials

f. Attachment devices

_________ 2. Concrete mix designs.





STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Provide labor, equipment, supervision and structural steel as shown on the Drawings, specified

herein and as needed for a complete and proper installation.


A. Section 032000 - Reinforcing Steel

B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

C. Section 053100 - Metal Deck

D. Section 099100 – Painting

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the

following organizations, apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the

reference.

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

AWS American Welding Society.

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council.

1.5 SUBMITTALS










A. Fabricate structural steel members and assemblies in accordance with AISC Code of Standard

Practice and Specifications. Company performing the Work of this Section shall have a least

five years of satisfactory experience in fabricating structural steel.

B. Qualification of Welders: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance

with AWS D1.1, including the installation of welded studs & metal deck. Provide

certifications that welders to be employed have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests

within the past 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the

Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of


1. Chapter 22 of the 2016 California Building Code including all applicable State of

California Amendments (CBC).

D. Erector: Company specializing in the Work for this Section shall have at least 5 years of

satisfactory experience in the erection of structural steel.

E. Testing and Inspections: Comply with Chapter 22 of the 2016 CBC, Section 01 4100 Testing

and Inspection and as noted on the Structural Drawings.

1. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Testing and Inspection Service at least 48 hours prior to

shop welding and prior to field welding of structural steel. Coordinate and provide

access to all locations for testing and inspection of structural steel Work.


A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Deliver members and materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location for

which they are intended and in time to insure uninterrupted progress of the construction.

2. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the approved Shop Drawings.

3. Store materials in a manner to preclude damage and permit ready access for inspection

and identification of each shipment. Store steel materials, either plain or fabricated,

above the ground upon platforms, pallets, skids, or other supports.

4. Keep materials free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter, and protect from

corrosion. Material showing evidence of damage will be rejected and shall be

immediately removed from the site.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of items to be embedded in and/or attached to the Work of Sections 03

1000, 03 3000 and 05 3100.





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use only new and undamaged materials. Steel which in the opinion of the Architect is

corroded or physically damaged shall not be incorporated in the construction.

B. Exposed Steel Work: Where steel surfaces are exposed to view in the finish construction, use

only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by

welding and grinding; before cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Structural steel wide flange shapes: ASTM A 992, Grade 50.

B. Angles, channels, plates, rods and bars: ASTM A36

C. Structural steel tubes: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

D. Structural steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

E. Common Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325N. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts where exposed

and where embedded in masonry.

F. Anchor bolts and Rods: ASTM F 1554

G. Automatic End Welded Studs: Studs shall be Nelson Granular Flux filled Shear Connectors or

Anchor Studs, or an approved equal. Studs shall be manufactured of C-1015 cold rolled steel

conforming to ASTM Specification A-108. When welding through deck, the stud diameter

shall not be greater than 2.5 times the beam flange thickness. Comply with AWS D1.1.

H. Filler metal for welding: Meet the requirements of AWS D1.1. Electrodes shall be as

recommended by their manufacturer for position and other conditions of actual use.

Electrodes shall be E70 series.

I. Moment frame welding: Meet the requirements of AWS D1.8.

J. Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast curing, lead free, universal modified

alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility

with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field

applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure, complying with performance requirements of

Federal Specifications TT-P-645.





K. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,

water reducing and plasticizing additive, capable of developing a minimum compressive

strength of 5,000 psi in 7 days.

L. Galvanize structural steel assemblies, members and connectors not permanently protected

from weather and moisture per ASTM A 123.

M. Templates: Any commercial grade steel, not less than 10 gage.

N. Galvanizing Repair Compound: High zinc dust content galvanizing repair paint conforming

to Mil. Spec DOD-P-21035A, hot applied zinc rich material or equal.

O. Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 03 2000.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and assemble materials in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Shearing, flame

cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Coordinate connection details

where steel is connected to concrete and masonry. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions, where

possible, just before commencing fabrication of connection details. Correct construction that

does not fit. Schedule and coordinate construction under this Section with that specified

elsewhere. When not otherwise indicated or specified, comply with application requirements

of AISC “Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings”.

B. Before beginning fabrication or Work, wire-brush materials clean of loose mill scale and rust,

and straighten by methods that will not injure the steel and so that they will comply with AISC

tolerances.

C. Welded Connections: Make welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1. Assemble

and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without

warp. Grind and dress smooth all welds exposed to view in the finish construction, so that the

shape and profile of the item welded is preserved.

D. Automatic End-Welded Studs: The studs shall be automatically end welded in accordance with

AWS D1.1 in such a manner as to provide complete fusion between the end of the stud and the

plate. There shall be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between the welded end of the

stud and the plate. The stud shall decrease in length during welding approximately 1/8" for

5/8" diameter studs and under, and 3/16" for stud diameters greater than 5/8" diameter.

Welding shall be done only by qualified welders approved by the welding inspector.

E. Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal. Do not cut or

enlarge holes by burning. Holes may be enlarged by careful reaming. Holes in base or

bearing plates shall be drilled. Holes shall be provided in members to permit connection the

construction of other trades.





1. Material may be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt,

whenever the thickness of metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the bolt plus

1/8 inch.

F. Templates: Fabricate individual templates for each and every assembly to be anchored to or

embedded in concrete and/or masonry. Locate working centerlines of each template by

drilling hole or deep center punch. Remove templates prior to erection of members.

2.4 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint structural steel except galvanized members or those members or portions

of members to be embedded in concrete or in masonry & grout. On embedded steel which is

partially exposed, paint the exposed portion and the initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.

Do not paint surfaces to be welded.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted.

Remove loose rust, loose mill scale and splatter, slag or flux deposits using power tool

cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-3.

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop primer in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5

mils. Use painting methods which results in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and

exposed surfaces, without drips, sags, etc.

2.5 GALVANIZING

A. General: All steel and ferrous metal items located on the exterior of the buildings, exposed to

moisture and otherwise indicated to be galvanized shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process,

meeting the requirements of ASTM A 123. All required hot-dip galvanizing shall be done

after fabrication, in the largest sections possible. Items too large for available dip tanks shall

be sprayed, by approved methods, with molten zinc to coating thickness of 0.003 inch to 0.004

inch.

B. Coating Weight: Weight of the Zinc coating per square foot of actual surface shall average

not less than 2.0 ounces and no individual specimen shall be less than 1.8 ounces.

C. Repair of Coating: Restore shop galvanized metal necessitating field soldering or welding

which in any manner removes original galvanizing, by using galvanizing repair compound in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


3.1 PREPARATION





A. Field measure and Templates: Secure field measurements required for proper and adequate

fabrication and installation. Furnish templates for exact location of items to be embedded in

concrete and/or masonry including instructions required for installation.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: In accordance with California Code of Regulations (CCR),

Title 8, design, provide temporary shoring, erection bracing and bracing members with

connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and

connections when permanent members are securely in place and final connections are

complete. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structure as erection

proceeds.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Setting Base and Bearing Plates: After the supported members have been plumbed, aligned

and properly positioned, set base and bearing plates. Support plates on adjustable bolt

supports or shims until grout has set. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or

plates to ensure that no voids remain. Follow grout manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Framing: Except as specified herein, erect framing in accordance with AISC Code of

Standard Practice and the 2016 CBC. Plan and layout framing so that cutting will not be

required. Erect construction plumb, square, and true to line, level, and position indicated

within tolerances established in the AISC Code of Standard Practice.

C. Holding and Protection: In assembling and during welding hold the component parts with

sufficient clamps or other adequate means to keep parts straight and in close contact. In

welding, take precautions to minimize “lock-up” stress and distortion due to heat. In wind,

perform welding only after adequate wind protection is furnished and set up.

D. Connections: Bolt field connections except where welding is indicated. Perform welding as

specified for shop welding.

E. On exposed construction, remove erection bolts, temporary welds, run-off plates and backing

strips. Fill erection bolt holes with plug welds and grind smooth.

F. Testing shall comply with Section 01 4100.

Section continued on the next page








requests.

Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included. Attach a letter

of explanation for each submittal not included.

Initials

_____________ All submitted products are as specified.


_______ 1. Fabricator’s Qualifications

_______ 2. Erector’s Qualifications

_______ 3. Mill test certificates including heat or melt numbers for each type and size of steel

used in the Work.

_______ 4. Shop and erection drawings including complete details and schedules for

fabrication, shop and field assembly of members and erection bracing. Should

more than one submittal be required, late submittals shall clearly identify

materials added or revised subsequent to previous submittal.

a. Shop drawings and fabricated assemblies and members shall be properly

marked to identify their location on site.

b. Indicate each weld by AWS symbol, size, type and length of weld.

c. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchor bolts

and other steel assemblies into concrete and/or masonry.

d. Identify shop drawing details by reference to sheet and detail number of the

Drawings.

_______ 5. Welder’s Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verify AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months.





COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide cold-formed punched channel studs framing for exterior walls and partitions as shown

and specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for required

submittals.


A. System components (studs, track, blocking, etc.) shall be by a single manufacturer.

B. Tolerance: Framing shall be plumb, even and flat to within 1/8" in 10'. Tolerance shall be non-

cumulative.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s

unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off

ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL FRAMING

A. System Components: With metal framing required, provide manufacturer’s standard steel

runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories

as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete

metal framing system.

B. Materials and Finishes:

1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality

prime steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; A653.

2. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A653 for




COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 2

minimum G60 coating.

3. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with corrosion-resistant

plated finish.

4. Welding & Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS D1.3 and as recommended by stud

manufacturer.

5. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damage, prepare surfaces and repair in

accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780.

C. “C”-Shaped Studs: Manufacturer’s standard steel studs of shape and gage indicated on

Drawings, with 1.625 inches flange and flange return lip, unless otherwise noted on the

drawings.

1. Provide stud size as indicated on Drawings.

2. Comply with ICC ESR-3064P.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate

panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform

lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.

B. Fastening: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding,

bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. All screws shall be per Hilti [ICC

ESR-2196] or ITW Buildex [ICC ESR-3223].


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Pre-Installation Conference:

1. Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at Project Site with installers of

other work including door and mechanical and electrical work.

2. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support

provisions for interfacing work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s

printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout

at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of

construction involved. For interior partitions, do not exceed 48" o.c. for nail or power driven

fasteners or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. For exterior partitions, do not exceed 24"

o.c. for nail or power driven fasteners or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide





fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

C. Set studs plum, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Where stud system abuts structural walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of lateral

stiffeners to supporting structure.

E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or

partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and

furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of

supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer’s

recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting

from item supported.

F. Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to bottom runner tracks by either welding or

screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. Secure studs to top runner tracks as shown

to accommodate building movement.

G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except

where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer’s instructions. Install runner

tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud

shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system

wall opening frame in manner indicated.

H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, with separate studs; do not bridge the joint

with components of stud system.

I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 5'-0" on

center. Weld at each intersection.

J. Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and

installation. Use compatible primer per Section 099100 for prime coated surface; use

galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces.









requests.


Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included.

Initials

________ All submitted products are as specified.


______ 1. Physical data on each stud.

2. Framing attachments (screws, etc.)

3. Framing clips and bridging.

END OF SECTION 054000




ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 – GENERAL





A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and installation to complete framing and sheathing of

exterior and interior walls and partitions as shown and specified.


061600 – Sheathing

1.4 REFERENCES


following organizations apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the

reference.

APA American Plywood Association - Visual Inspection

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

AWPA American Wood Preservers Association

DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association

ICC International Code Council

PS Public Standards of the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of

Standards


WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WWPA Western Wood Products Association

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Product data and current ICC Evaluation Service Reports for attachment

accessories.

a. Framing Devices and framing connectors

b. Gun nails






A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing


1. Chapter 23 of the 2016 California Building Code (CBC).

2. ANSI/AF&PA NDS-2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction.

3. Standard Grading Rules No. 17 of the WCLIB or the Standard Grading Rules of the

WWPA. Lumber to have visible grade stamp of an agency certified by the WCLIB.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections to be attached to, or built into,

wood framing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER

A. Moisture content: The maximum moisture content of framing lumber shall not exceed 19%

just prior to enclosing or covering framing with plywood, gypsum wallboard and/or plaster.

To ensure compliance, lumber up to 2 inch thick should be seasoned to a moisture content of

19% or less and be stamped “S-Dry”. Lumber over 2 inch thick may be shipped unseasoned

and stamped “S-Green”.

B. Structural lumber shall be S4S stress-marked Douglas Fir-Larch, manufactured and graded in

accordance with WCLIB or WWPA, with minimum grades as follows unless noted otherwise:

1. Joists & Rafters No. 1

2. 4x & 6x Beams/Headers No. 1 or better

3. Wall Studs No. 1

4. Blocking, stripping & misc. No. 2

C. Grade stamp: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,

grade species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. All Nails shall be common wire nails with dimensions complying with CBC Table 2304.9.1,

manufacture shall conform to Fed. Spec, FF-N-1-1 and shall be hot-dipped galvanized for

exterior locations, high humidity locations and for treated wood; plain finish for other interior

locations; size and type to suit application.

1. Box nails and/or “Sinker” nails are not acceptable for Work shown and/or detailed on the

Structural Drawings.





B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers conforming to ASTM A-307 shall be hot-dipped galvanized for

exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior

locations.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type.

D. Lag Screws, Lag Bolts, Pins and Wood Screws: Sized to suit application: hot-dipped

galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for

other interior locations. Comply with NDS Section 11.1.3.

E. Framing connectors: current ICC Evaluation Services Report, sized and profiled to suit

application; hot-dipped galvanized finish, manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, KC

Metals, or approved equal.

F. Gun Nails: Use Common Nails or current ICC Evaluation Services Report special gun nails of

the same wire diameter and length as common nails specified on the Drawings. Box nails

and/or “Sinker” nails are not acceptable for Work shown on the Structural Drawings.

G. Drypack: Cement/sand drypack composed of one part cement to 3 parts sand. Dry mix first

then add with only enough water to hold the mix together. Drypack required under sills as

noted on the Drawings.

2.3 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): Chromated zinc chloride or Wolman salts for

pressure treated members.

B. Pressure treatment of Douglas Fir-Larch plates, nailers, ledgers and other exposed wood

structures, shall be in accordance with the AWPA’s standards for the purchase and

preservation of treated timber, with a retention of a least 0.35 lb. Wolman salts, 0.75 lb

chromated zinc chloride per cubic feet of lumber, or 0.30 lb. per cubic foot of

Pentachlorophenol type “C” light solvent. In exposed conditions, the incising of the lumber

shall be waived.

1. See Architectural Drawings for treatment of trellis members.

C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, manufactured by Woodlife, “Res” or equal.


3.1 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to the site ready for installation all wood materials requiring

pressure impregnated preservatives.

B. Treat site-sawn ends and holes in pressure treated lumber.





1. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

2. Allow site applied preservative to cure prior to erecting members.

3.2 FRAMING

A. Layout, cutting and installation of framing shall be under the continuous supervision of a full-

time carpenter foreman experienced in all phases of framing construction and exposed

architectural framing required for the Work of this Section and on the Contract Drawings.

B. Structural members shall not be cut for pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., unless specifically noted or

detailed on the Structural Drawings.

C. Erect wood framing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment

more than 1/4 inch. Install simple span members with crown up.

D. Space framing members at 16 inches on center unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

E. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths except as noted on the

Drawings.

F. Holes in wood for bolts shall be drilled 1/32" to 1/16" larger than the diameter of the bolt.

G. Number of fasteners shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as noted in the ICC Evaluation

Report where number of fasteners are not shown on the Drawings.

H. Sheet metal framing connectors shown on the Drawings shall be Simpson connectors as

manufactured by the Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Superspeed Connectors as

manufactured by the KC Metals company or equal.

I. Bolts shall have standard cut washers under heads and/or nuts where in contact with wood.

Bolt threads shall not bear on wood.

J. Lag bolts, lag screws and wood screws shall be screwed (not driven) into wood members. In

placing lag screws or wood screws in wood, a hole of the same diameter and depth of “the

solid shank” shall be bored after which the hole with a diameter equal to the diameter of the

screw at the root of the thread shall be continued to a depth equal to the threaded screw length

portion. Provide cut washers under the heads of lag bolts/lag screws where in contact with

wood.

K. Bolts, lag screws and wood screws shall be re-tightened prior to the application of drywall,

plywood, plaster, etc.

L. Drive nails perpendicular to grain of wood in lieu of toenailing, where feasible.

M. For conditions not covered on the Drawings, provide penetration into the piece receiving the

point of not less than 1/2 the length of the common nail or spike, provided, however, that 16d

nails may be used to connect two pieces of two inch (nominal) thickness.





3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Clean up leftover materials of this Section and legally dispose off site. Dispose of pressure-

treated wood in an authorized disposal area. Burning of materials on the Site is prohibited.

Do not bury material and/or wood of any type on the job site.





GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 1

SECTION 06 16 43

GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Gypsum sheathing board on exterior face of exterior stud walls.


A. See Division 01

B. See section 01 81 22 Acoustical Performance Requirements

C. See section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule installation to keep gypsum sheathing exposure to ultraviolet (UV) rays within

manufacturer's recommended limits.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the

work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer product data for sheathing and fasteners.

1. Submit a list of proposed products and accessories to be used on this project.

B. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754,

provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and

deflections.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in College

District's name and registered with manufacturer.

D. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information;

1. Low Emitting Materials

2. Local/Regional Materials

3. Recycled Materials






A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 5 years of experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) publication GA-801 "Handling Gypsum

Board" and applicable requirements of ASTM C 1264 for sampling, inspection, rejection,

certification, packaging, marking, shipping, handling, and storage of gypsum panel products.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide specific protection against problems resulting from defective

materials for 5 years after Substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: G-P Gypsum Products Dens-Glass Gold (Type X) sheathing board complying

with ASTM C 1177, www.gpgypsum.com.

B. National Gypsum Goldbond E2 XP, www.nationalgypsum.com.

C. USG Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing, www.usg.com.

D. Temple Inland GreenGlass, www.templeinland.com.

E. CertainTeed GlasRoc Sheathing, www.certainteed.com.

F. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum sheathing: One of the following 1/2-inch thick, or equal complying with ASTM C

1177.

1. Dens-Glass Gold (Standard and Type X) sheathing board by G-P Gypsum Products

complying with ASTM C 1177 (basis of design).

2. National Gypsum "Goldbond E2 XP."

3. USG "Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing."

4. Temple Inland "GreenGlass."





B. Screws: Steel drill screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a

salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329-inch thick, attach sheathing in compliance with ASTM

C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112-inch thick, attach sheathing in compliance with

ASTM C 954.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Gypsum sheathing tape: Use only tapes approved by the sheathing manufacturers.

1. 3M" contractor sheathing tape NO.8086-inch by 3M Company.

2. Perm-A-Barrier" wall seam tape by WR Grace &CO.

3. 108JTN" by Royston Laboratories.

4. Polyken 610" by Polyken Technologies.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Joint compound: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Nails, wood framing: 11-gauge galvanized roofing nails with 7/16" head, 1-1/2" min. length for

1/2" panel and 1-3/4" length for 5/8" panel.

D. Screws, metal framing per manufacturers recommendations:

1. Bugle or wafer head, self-tapping, rust-resistant, fine thread for heavy-steel gauge

2. Bugle or wafer head, rust-resistant sharp point, fine thread for light-gauge metal framing

or furring.

E. Screws, wood framing:

1. Rust-resistant, bugle or wafer head, coarse thread, 1-1/4" length sharp point for wood.

2. Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C 514.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing to support sheathing board and verify that the surface of any framing or

furring member does not vary more than 1/8-inch from the plane of faces of adjacent members.

B. Verify that studs, blocking and supporting materials are in place and ready for sheathing

attachment prior to starting work.

C. Coordinate the exterior placement of electrical, mechanical and plumbing wall devices,

accessories and access panels, wall signage and other type wall construction with other trades

before proceeding with work and during installation.

D. Correct detrimental conditions before proceeding with installation.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Sheathing must be installed in accordance with the instructions in Gypsum Association

document GA-253 and ASTM C1280. Sheathing can be attached parallel or

perpendicular to wood or metal framing. Use appropriate board orientation for specific

fire assemblies and shear wall applications within this document, other reference

documents or as required by designing authority. The framing width shall not be less than

1-1/2” (38 mm) wide for wood framing and 1-1/4” (32 mm) for steel framing. Framing

members shall not vary more than 1/8” (3 mm) from the plane of the faces of adjacent

framing.

2. Fasteners should be driven flush with the panel surface (not countersunk) and into the

framing system. Locate fasteners at least 3/8” (9 mm) from the ends and edges of the

sheathing. Nails or screws, as listed in the fastener chart, may be used to attach Sheathing

to framing. When a pneumatic fastening system into metal is used to attach Sheathing,

consult with manufacturer for application specifications and shear resistance data.

Sheathing is not to be used as a base for nailing or other fastening.

3. Install Sheathing with joints staggered. Sheathing shall be properly flashed at openings

and preferably located so that no joint will align with an edge of the opening. Ends and

edges of the sheathing should fit tightly. Sheathing panels shall not be less than 7” (178

mm) from the finish grade in fully weather- and water-protected siding systems, and not

less than 12” (305 mm) from the ground for properly drained and ventilated crawl spaces.

4. Provide sheathing board at all exterior locations as required to accomplish new work.

a. Install sheathing board with correct face out.

b. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints.

c. Attach sheathing board to wood and metal framing per manufacturers installation

guide.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect sheathing panels in place during the construction period against exposure UV rays, to

weather, and to other sources of moisture in excess of manufacturer's recommended limits by

covering exposed sheathing surfaces with products acceptable to manufacturer for

accomplishing these goals.

END OF SECTION




FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 1

SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Finish carpentry items.

B. Hardware and attachment accessories.


A. See Division 1


A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated

and adjacent components.

B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data:

1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.

2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.

1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.

2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork

Standards.

3. Include certification program label.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long.

E. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information:

1. FSC Wood Content








A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this

section with minimum five years of documented experience.

1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20

percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.

2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.

3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.

B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality

certification of completed work.

1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS

Grade or Grades specified.

2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.

3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.

4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and

products meet the specified requirements.

5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.

6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.


A. Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by

AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required

by applicable code.

C. Woodwork Items:

1. Window exterior sills and casings: Species: Maple; prepare for paint finish.

2.2 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.

C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.





2.3 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Softwood Lumber: Douglas Fir species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent;

with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

B. Hardwood Lumber: Maple species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with

vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

2.4 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue

type as recommended for application.

B. Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density

fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application.

C. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, book matched, medium density fiberboard core;

HPVA HP-1, Grade AA, glue type as recommended for application.

D. Prefinished Paneling: Douglas Fir face species, book matched, V-cut vertical joint scoring; 3/16

inch thick, finished as gloss.

E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density,

made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.

2.5 FASTENINGS

A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing

formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.

B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; flush finish in exposed locations. Custom finish to

match wood stain or paint.

C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.

B. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.

B. Cabinet and Drawer Hardware: Provide touch latches and/or U shaped wire pulls at all accessible

casework or equally accessible pull hardware per CBC 11B-309.





2.8 TREATMENT

A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of

providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA U1 Treatment using water borne

preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.

C. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material.

D. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.

E. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 6 percent moisture content.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Shop to assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide

trim for scribing and site cutting.

2.10 SHOP FINISHINGS

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.

C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is

of type recommended for the applicable finish.

D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section

5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:

1. Transparent:

a. System - 8, Acrylic Cross Linking, Water-based

b. Sheen: Flat.

2. Opaque:

a. System - 4, Latex Acrylic, Water-based.

b. Color: As selected by Architect.

c. Sheen: Flat.

E. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards

requirements for grade indicated.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

D. Install prefinished paneling with full bed contact adhesive applied to substrate.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.

B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious

materials.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION




ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 1

SECTION 06 41 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Countertops.

C. Cabinet hardware.

D. Preparation for installing utilities.


A. See Division 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.

1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.

2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork

Standards.

3. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the Architectural

Woodwork Standards.

4. Furnish a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on the first page of the shop

drawings.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,

illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.

E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,

demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

1. FSC Wood Content








A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this

section with minimum five years of documented experience.

1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20

percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.

B. Monitored Compliance:

1. Millwork and the installation thereof for this project shall be monitored for compliance to

the contract documents by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services.

a. Full particulars of the Woodwork Institute Monitored Compliance Program may be

found at the Institute web site at www.woodworkinstitute.com. or by calling the

administrative office at 9163729943.

2. Schedule inspections by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services at the

beginning of fabrication, at the time of delivery, at the beginning of installation, at

completion, and such additional times as the Director of Architectural Services considers

appropriate.

a. Written report shall be issued to all parties at the conclusion of each inspection.

3. Millwork and/or installation found to be non-compliant (and not corrected) will be rejected.

4. Issuance of a Monitored Compliance Certificate is a prerequisite of acceptance.

5. Fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Monitored Compliance program are the

responsibility of the millwork manufacturer and/or installer and shall be included in their

bid.

1.5 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware, and

finishes.

B. Locate where directed.

C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Protect units from moisture damage.

B. Do not deliver casework until the following conditions are met:

1. Building is closed in.

2. Wet work and overhead work are complete.

3. HVAC is on, maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit and humidity

between 45% and 65%.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS AND CASEWORK

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by

AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for premium.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-

pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

1. Wilsonart International (Basis of Design)

2. Formica Corporation.

3. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.

4. Or equal

2.2 COUNTERTOPS

A. Solid Surfacing- material Counter tops

1. Applicable standards:

a. 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein:

b. a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

c. b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

d. c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

e. d. NSF International

2. Fire test response characteristics:

a. a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning characteristics as

determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E 84) or another testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.

c. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

3. Allowable tolerances:

a. 1. Variation in component size: ±1/8" (3 mm) over a 10' length.

b. 2. Location of openings: ±1/8" (3 mm) from indicated location.

c. 3. Maximum 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between quartz surfaces and each wall.

4. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product:

a. Corian quartz surfaces from DuPont (basis of design)

b. Or Equal

5. Material:

a. Homogeneous quartz surfaces material.

b. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified.

6. Thickness: 2 cm (3/4").

7. Edge Treatment per drawings





8. Seam width: less than 1/8” unless otherwise noted

9. Sink Mounting – Underlayment unless otherwise noted

10. Backsplash: Same material unless otherwise noted

11. Endsplash: Same material unless otherwise noted

12. Colors and patterns to be selected by the Architect

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application and comply with SCAQMD VOC

levels.

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or

chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, or chrome-plated finish in exposed

locations.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

E. Grommets: Standard plated metal grommets for cut-outs, in color as scheduled.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9 and CBC 11B-309, types as recommended by fabricator for quality

grade specified and as modified below:

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards

or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated shelf rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal

1 inch spacing adjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.

D. Cabinet and Drawer Locks: Schlage CL100PB and CL200PB with C Keyway with satin chrome

finish #626.

1. Provide a Schedule for the cabinet locks installed.

2. Schedule to conform to BHMA A156.9 and include the following information:

a. Building that they are installed in.

b. Room number (use College's Room Numbers) where lock is installed in.

c. Manufacturer.

d. Model number of cylinder used.

3. Format of Schedule: Excel.

E. Catches: Magnetic.

F. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.





2. Static Load Capacity: As required by WI standards.

3. Mounting: Side mounted.

4. Stops: Integral type.

5. Features: Provide self-closing/stay closed type.

6. Products:

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.

b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.

c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, BHMA No. grade 1, steel with polished

finish.

1. Provide hinges with provision for attachment to all-glass doors where indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in accordance with WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards for specified quality levels.

B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.

C. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel

arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

D. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.

2.6 SHOP FINISHINGS

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

C. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (ARS),

Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:

1. Transparent:

a. System -12, Polyurethane, Water-based.

b. Stain: As selected by Architect.

c. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.





B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards and approved shop drawings.

B. Seismically secure casework in accordance with CBC and WI's ARS.

C. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

D. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

E. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION




THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Foam-plastic board insulation.

a. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation

b. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels

c. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels

d. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation

e. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation

2. Cellular-glass insulation.

3. Glass-fiber board insulation.

4. Mineral-wool board insulation.

5. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.

6. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.

7. Loose-fill insulation.

8. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.

9. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.

10. Radiant barriers.

11. Vapor retarders.


1. Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.






A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to

Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation in metal framed walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder

B. Insulation in and below metal framed ceiling structure: Batt insulation with no vapor barrier

C. Insulation attached to structural deck above Tavola Beam ceilings: Select Sound Black acoustic

board

D. Insulation directly above all metal ceilings: Rolled 1” thick mineral fiber glass insulation

E. Insulation above roof metal deck: Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.

b. Dow Chemical Company (The).

c. Rmax, Inc.

d. AEP Span.





e. Or equal.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation

securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. Johns Manville Ins

3. Knauf Insulation.

4. Owens Corning. (Select Sound Acoustic Board as basis of Design)

5. Or equal.

B. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no

formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than

0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

C. Product Description

1. SelectSound Acoustic Board is a lightweight and resilient insulation material with a black

mat faced finish that can be used for eliminating sound and light reflections or for pre-

venting insulation from showing through most surface treatments.

D. Perfromance Requirements

1. Product shall be available in standard thickness of 1”, 2” and 4”. All thicknesses shall

have a Standard density of 3.0 pcf.

2. SelectSound Acoustic Board shall be available in 24” x 48” and 48” x 96” standard sizes.

Pre-cut sizes up to 48” x 96” shall also be available upon request

3. Product shall be dimensionally stable with no capability for shrinking or warping.

4. Product shall have a resilient composition with good resistance to damage from job-site

impact.

5. Product shall be composed of inorganic glass fibers.

6. Product’s mat face shall be able to be cleaned by vacuuming.

7. Product shall not be susceptible to rot or mildew contamination.

8. Product shall not cause corrosion greater than caused by sterile cotton to steel and alumi-

num, When tested in accordance with ASTM C665.

9. Acoustical Performance (Tested to ASTM C423, Type A mounting)

Product Density Thickness Octave Band Center Frequencies, Hz

Pcf

(kg/m3)

In (mm) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

SelectSound

Acoustic

Board

3.0 (48) 1.0 (25)

2.0 (51)

0.05

0.25

0.25

0.73

0.61

1.08

0.94

1.11

1.06

0.99

0.86

0.99

0.70

1.00





10. Surface Burning of Core Material (tested to UL 723, or CAN/ULC-S102-M): Flame

spread 25, smoke developed 50.

11. Water vapor sorption – by weight (Tested to ASTM C1104): <3% at 120oF (49oC) at

95% relative humidity.

12. Minimum Compressive Strength (Tested to ASTM C165):

3 lb. Density

1. At 10% deformation 25 lb/ft2 (1197 Pa)

2. At 25% deformation 90 lb/ft2 (4309 Pa)

13. Fungi resistance: Meets all requirements of ASTM C1338

2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.

3. Johns Manville.

4. Knauf Insulation.

5. Owens Corning.

6. Or equal.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Coated Rolled 1” thick mineral fiber glass insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; Category 1 (membrane

is a vapor barrier). Rolls Form available in 16”, 24” and 48” widths. Available in 1” and 2”

thickness. Face and edge coated in black.

D. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-

reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1

(membrane is a vapor barrier).

E. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),

Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor

barrier).

F. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective

faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane

is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

G. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B

(faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane is

a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.





H. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to

fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic

spaces and vented eaves.

I. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no

formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than

0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating

of 0.13 perm.

B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to

an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not

less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm.

1. Products:

a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.

c. Or equal.

C. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene

film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or

polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating

of 0.1317 perm and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60,

respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Products:

a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR.

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR.

c. Or equal.

D. Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: Two layers of 0.5-mil- thick polyester film laminated to

an inner layer of 1-mil- thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate in

flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes

of 5, per ASTM E 84.

1. Products:

a. Alumiseal Corporation; Zero Perm Vapor Barrier.

b. Or equal.





E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

F. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,

Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.

H. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has

demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer

in place.

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Gemco; Spindle Type.

c. Or equal.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with

self-locking washer in place.

1. Products:

a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.

b. Or equal.

2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with

each leg 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-

steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation

securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc

b. Gemco





c. Or equal.

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Crawl spaces.

b. Ceiling plenums.

c. Attic spaces.

d. Where indicated.

D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle

of insulation anchor to maintain air space of min. 1 inch between face of insulation and

substrate to which anchor is attached.

1. Products:

a. Gemco; Clutch Clip.

E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to

substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including

removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation

attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions

and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard

thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness

indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.





3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according

to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 12 inches below exterior

grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior

walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.

both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation

between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press

units firmly against inside substrates.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in

completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation

manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing

members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or

protected from contact with insulation.

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at

vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to

flanges of metal studs.





6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as

follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling

flanges to sides of framing members.

b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of

adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is

installed over it.

7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and

seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on Drawings.

b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity.

D. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written

instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to

uniform density, but do not compact excessively.

1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard

Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."

E. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and

electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not

indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of

studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where

required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket

insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up

either side of partitions.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation

anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to





insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and

application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between

concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over

spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not

to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers

to tips of spindles.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION

A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to

curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.

1. insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window

frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold

insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of

dimension indicated between insulation and glass.

2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent

insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to

extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with

adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover

miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.

1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of

wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.

2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing

including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.

Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-

retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.

Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder

fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and

vapor retarders.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.





3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,

physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation

is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction

immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION




AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1

SECTION 07 27 00

AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for supplying labor, materials, tools, and equipment

to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings Architectural Division as specified

herein including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Adhesive/Primer

2. Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier

3. Air Barrier

4. Sealant

1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. DIVISION 06 – Section 06 16 43 – Gypsum Sheathing

B. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation

C. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

D. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 92 05 – Joint Sealants

E. DIVISION 08 – Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows

1.03. REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 711-13 - Voluntary Specification for Self-Adhering Flashing Used for

Installation of Exterior Wall Fenestration Products

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic

Sheeting

2. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive

Bonds

3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

4. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

5. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

6. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

C. International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES):

1. ICC- ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water Resistive Barriers

D. US Green Building Council (USGBC), Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

(LEED)





1.04. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to

establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work

with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include but not be limited to the

following:

1. Review of submittals.

2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period and installation procedures.

3. Review of special details and flashings.

4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities and schedule for Subsequent operations.

5. Review of mock-up requirements.

6. Review of inspection, testing, protection and repair procedures.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide the following requested information in accordance with Section 01 33 00

Submittal Procedures.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data:

a. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s guide specification

b. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s complete set of technical data sheets for assembly

c. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s complete set of details for assembly

2. Certificates:

a. Product certification confirming assembly components are supplied and

warranted by a single source Air Barrier Manufacturer

b. LEED HPD declaration

3. Tests and Evaluation Reports:

a. Acceptance criteria for water-resistive barriers: ICC – ES AC38

4. Warranty:

a. Sample warranty as specified

1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain air barrier and auxiliary materials including adhesive/primer, air barrier,

flashings, and sealants from a single Air Barrier Manufacturer regularly engaged in

the manufacturing and supply of the specified products.

2. Verify product compliance with federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Air Barrier Manufacturer shall demonstrate qualifications to supply materials of

this Section by certifying the following:

a. Air Barrier Manufacturer must not issue warranties for terms longer than they

have been manufacturing and supplying specified products for similar scope

of Work.

C. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in installation of air barriers with minimum three years’

experience and certified by air barrier manufacturer.

OR





2. Currently accredited by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) whose

applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program.

1.07. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials:

1. Deliver materials to the jobsite in undamaged and clearly marked containers

indicating the name of the manufacturer and product.

B. Storage of Materials:

1. Store materials as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to applicable

safety regulatory agencies. Refer to all applicable data including, but not limited to,

Safety Data Sheet (SDS), Technical Data sheet (TDS), product labels, and specific

instructions for personal protection.

2. Keep solvents away from open flame or excessive heat.

3. Store materials in original packaging.

4. Protect rolls from direct sunlight until ready for use.

5. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS.

C. Handling:

1. Refer to Air Barrier Manufacturer’s product TDS.

1.8. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not perform Work during rain or inclement weather.

2. Do not perform Work on frost covered substrates or surfaces that are wet to touch.

B. Protection:

1. It is the responsibility of the installing Subcontractor to protect all surfaces not

included in scope of Work from overspray including, but not limited to, windows,

doors, adjacent areas, and vehicles.

2. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and

after application of air barrier assembly.

C. Complete preparation Work prior to installing air barrier.

D. Ground all equipment during operations.

1.9. WARRANTY

A. Material Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

fluid-applied air barrier membrane materials that fail within specified warranty period

when installed and used in strict conformance with written manufacturer's instructions.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to maintain air permeance rating not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. under

a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 pst) (equal to 0.02 Us. x sq. m. @

75 Pa), when tested per ASTM E2178, within specified warranty period.

b. Failure to maintain a vapor permeance rating greater than 10 perms when tested

in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.





c. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. Air Barrier and auxiliary materials shall comply with the following system requirements:

1. Obtain air barrier and auxiliary materials as a single-source from the manufacturer

to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. Basis of Design: Blueskin®

VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier by Henry Company

2. Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers:

a. ICC – ES AC38: Pass

3. Air leakage:

a. ASTM E2178: Pass

4. Water resistance:

a. ASTM E331: Pass

5. Nail Sealability:

a. AAMA 711: Pass

b. ASTM D1970: Pass

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Henry® Company

2. Or, approved equal

2.02. MATERIALS

A. Primary Sheet-Applied, Vapor Permeable Water Resistive Air Barrier (Basis of Design):

1. Self-adhered vapor permeable, water resistive air barrier consisting of a reinforced,

modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented permeable adhesive

technology with split-back poly-release film; having the following typical physical

properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air

Barrier

b. Color: Blue

c. Thickness: 19 mils (0.48 mm)

d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms

e. Air Permeance (ASTM E2178): Pass

f. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass

g. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):

1. Flame Spread: Class A

2. Smoke Development: Class A

h. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C)

B. Assembly Auxiliary Materials:

1. Adhesives/Primers:

a. Standard VOC adhesive:

1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive; having the following

typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Adhesive





b. Color: Blue

c. Maximum VOC: 450 g/L

d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes

e. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)

b. Low VOC adhesive:

1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive with low VOC content;

having the following typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® LVC Adhesive

b. Color: Blue

c. Maximum VOC: <240 g/L



2. Polymer emulsion water based quick setting adhesive with low VOC

content; having the following typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Aquatac™ Primer

b. Color: Aqua

c. Maximum VOC: 50 g/L



c. Aerosol spray adhesive:

1. Quick drying spray adhesive used to prepare construction surfaces for the

application of flashings; having the following typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Spray Prep Adhesive

b. Color: Clear amber

c. Solids by weight: 35%


e. Low Application Temperature: -10 degrees F (-23 degrees C)

2. Liquid-Applied Flashing:

a. Moisture-curing single component elastomeric liquid-applied flashing using a

highly advanced Silyl-Terminated Polyether (STPE) polymer curing to a

monolithic membrane; having the following typical physical properties:

1. Basis of design: Henry® Air-Bloc® LF Liquid-Applied Flashing

2. Color: Blue

3. Air Permeance (ASTM E2178): Pass

4. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 21.8 perms @ 25 mils

5. Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies (ASTM E2357): Pass

6. Water Resistance (AC212/ASTM D2247): Pass

7. Nail Sealability (AAMA 711): Pass

8. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):

a. Flame Spread: Class A

b. Smoke Development: Class A

9. Elongation (D412): 264%

10. Low Application Temperature: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C)

3. Self-Adhered Flashing:

a. Non-Vapor Permeable Flashing:

1. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier

consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a white





engineered polypropylene film surface; having the following typical

physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Butyl Flash

b. Color: White


d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.14 perms

e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass

f. Elongation (ASTM D412): 825% minimum

g. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C)

2. Flexible non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor

barrier consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a

creped, white engineered film; having the following typical physical

properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Flexible Butyl Flash

b. Color: White


d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): <0.1 perms


f. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)

3. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier

consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated

to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface; having the following

typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® WB25 Window and Door

Flashing

b. Color: Blue

c. Thickness: 25 mils (.63 mm)

d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms

e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum


4. Low temperature non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air

and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound

integrally laminated to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface;


a. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® WB Window and Door Flashing

Color: Blue

b. Thickness:35 mils (0.9 mm)

c. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms

d. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass

e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum


b. Vapor Permeable Flashing:

1. Self-adhered water resistive vapor permeable air barrier consisting of a

reinforced modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented

adhesive technology with split-back poly-release film; having the

following typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water

Resistive Air Barrier

b. Color: Blue


d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms






f. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C)

4. Sealants:

a. Building Envelope Sealant:

1. Moisture cure, medium modulus polymer modified sealing compound;


a. Basis of design: Henry® 925 BES Sealant

b. Color: Varies

c. Elongation: 450 – 550%.

b. Termination Sealant:

1. One-part high performance synthetic rubber sealant; having the

following typical physical properties:

a. Basis of design: Henry® 212 All Purpose Crystal Clear Sealant

b. Color: Clear

c. Elongation: 200% minimum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify substrates to receive Work and surrounding adjacent surfaces are in

accordance with manufacturer’s installation guide and as specified in this Section

prior to installation of self-adhered air barrier assembly.

2. Continuous substrate:

a. Existing substrate must be continuous and secured prior to application of air

barrier.

b. Securely fasten sheathing panels and install flush to ensure a continuous

substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guide and as

specified in this Section.

c. Fastener penetrations must be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid

backing.

d. Refer to manufacturer’s details.

3. Strike masonry joints flush.

4. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth and without large voids, spalled areas or sharp

protrusions. Refer to manufacturer’s details for substrate gap limitations.

5. Remove concrete forms and allow new concrete to cure for a minimum of fourteen

(14) days.

6. Curing compounds or release agents used in concrete construction must be resin

based without oil, wax or pigments.

7. Do not install air barrier over substrates that are wet to touch.

B. Notify Contractor in writing of any conditions that are not acceptable.

C. The installing contractor shall examine and determine that surfaces and conditions are

ready to accept the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer’s

installation guide and as specified in this Section. Commencement of Work or any parts

thereof shall mean installer’s acceptance of the substrate.





D. Do not apply air barrier until substrate and environmental conditions are in accordance

with manufacturer’s installation guide and as specified in this Section.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, frost,

laitance, loose and flaking particles, or other contaminants.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces not included in scope of Work to prevent spillage and

overspray.

C. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after

application of the air barrier assembly.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Ensure substrate is ready to receive air barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s

installation guide and as specified in this Section.

B. Temperature limitation:

1. Primary air barrier:

a. Substrate temperature must be above 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and rising.

2. Auxiliary products:

a. Temperature limitations may vary. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS for

product specific temperature limitations.

C. Application of flashing:

1. Self-adhered flashing:

a. Where required install adhesive/primer continuously at rate recommended by

manufacturer ensuring complete substrate coverage of anticipated flashing

installation area.

1. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to application of

flashing.

2. Primed areas not covered by end of day must be re-primed prior to

installation of flashing.

b. Measure and cut self-adhered flashing to ensure adequate length to achieve

continuous coverage of desired installation.

c. Peel protective film from self-adhered flashing and align top of membrane

verifying proper positioning prior to complete film removal and flashing

placement.

d. Press self-adhered flashing firmly into place by applying hand pressure to the

middle of the membrane and working the pressure to the edges; eliminating

wrinkles and air bubbles.

e. Install self-adhered flashings in shingle fashion to eliminate reverse laps.





f. Where required, prime laps at rate recommended by manufacturer to ensure

complete coverage of anticipated lap installation.

g. Lap adjoining edges a minimum of two (2) inches.

h. Roll flashing and laps with countertop roller to obtain thorough adhesion.

i. Seal reverse laps at self-adhered flashing with sealant. Sealant

recommendations may vary due to product or sequence of construction. Refer

to manufacturer details for recommended sealant.

2. Liquid-applied flashing:

a. Apply a uniform film of aerosol spray adhesive to raw edges of gypsum

sheathing at rate recommended by manufacturer completely encapsulating

loose gypsum core at the cut edge of gypsum sheathing.

b. Allow adhesive to cure to a tacky film prior to application of liquid-applied

flashing.

c. Apply flashing in accordance with and at rate recommended by manufacturer.

d. Spread flashing to achieve a monolithic membrane over substrate requiring

flashing.

e. Allow flashing to cure prior to subsequent installations.

D. Detailing/Flashing:

1. Complete detailing and flashing installations per manufacturer’s installation guide,

details, and this specification.

2. Refer to manufacturer details for further clarification and installation procedures


a. Inside corners

b. Outside corners

c. Pipe penetrations

d. Shelf angles

e. Wall to foundation transitions

f. Reverse laps

g. Construction joints

h. Rough openings:

1. Install rough opening details per Window Manufacturer’s installation

guide details and in accordance with ASTM E2112.

2. Wall assemblies containing a vapor retarder on the interior wall

assembly:

a. Extend flashing into rough opening to ensure sufficient membrane

for connection with vapor retarder and provide a continuous air

barrier assembly.

3. Transitions:

a. Contact manufacturer to coordinate transition of self-adhered air barrier to

adjacent areas including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Roof to air barrier

2. Air barrier to vertical or horizontal waterproofing





3. Fastener penetrations

E. Application of Primary Sheet-Applied Vapor Permeable Water Resistive Air Barrier:

1. Where required, install adhesive/primer continuously and at rate recommended by

manufacturer to ensure complete substrate coverage of anticipated flashing

installation area.

a. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to application of air

barrier.

b. Primed areas not covered by end of day must be re-primed prior to installation

of air barrier.

2. Peel protective film from primary air barrier and align top of verifying proper

positioning prior to complete film removal and placement.

3. Press primary air barrier firmly into place by applying hand pressure to the middle

of the membrane and working the pressure to the edges; eliminating wrinkles and

air bubbles.

4. Install primary air barrier in shingle fashion to eliminate reverse laps.

5. For lap adhesion enhancements, install standard or low VOC adhesive continuously

and at rate recommended by manufacturer to ensure substrate coverage of

anticipated flashing installation area.

a. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to subsequent primary air

barrier installation.

6. Horizontal applications:

a. Horizontal seams: two (2) inch minimum.

b. Vertical seams: three (3) inch minimum.

7. Roll primary air barrier and laps with countertop roller to obtain thorough adhesion.

8. Seal permanent reverse laps of primary air barrier with termination sealant.

F. Fastener Penetrations Through Primary Air Barrier:

1. It is the responsibility of the installer penetrating the air barrier assembly to install

fasteners/assembly components in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation

guide and as specified in this Section.

2. Installation requirements:

a. Drill fasteners/assembly components with sufficient compression to maintain

continuity in the air barrier assembly.

b. Refer to “Self-tapping fasteners” and/or “Pre-drilled fasteners”.

3. Supplemental sealant:

a. Penetrations that do not meet installation requirements require the addition of

termination sealant at point of insertion through the air barrier to maintain

continuity in the air barrier assembly.

4. Self-tapping fasteners:

a. Fastener head/assembly component must be larger in diameter than the

fastener shank.





b. Install fastener head/assembly component to provide a continuous

compression firmly against the air barrier creating a gasketing seal without

damaging the membrane.

c. Do not install fastener head/assembly components through the air barrier over

unsupported areas of the substrate such as sheathing joints.

d. Remove overdriven fasteners, improperly installed fasteners, defective/broken

fasteners, or fasteners not properly fastened into the building structure beyond

the air barrier membrane and seal the vacated hole with termination sealant

prior to the installation of the exterior cladding.

5. Pre-drilled fastening assemblies:

a. Fastening head/assembly component must be larger in diameter than

predrilled hole.

b. Install fastening head/assembly component to provide a continuous

compression firmly against the air barrier creating a gasketing seal without

damaging the membrane.

c. Do not install fastening head/assembly components through air barrier over

unsupported areas of the substrate such as sheathing joints.

d. Seal improperly drilled and/or vacated holes with termination sealant prior to

the installation of the exterior cladding.

3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Observation and Verification:

1. Owner’s representative, Builder, or manufacturer shall complete the final inspection

of the air barrier assembly as required by warranty. Do not cover installed weather

barriers until required inspections have been completed.

a. Contact manufacturer for warranty issuance requirements.

B. Install cladding as soon as practical after application. Air barrier assembly not designed

for permanent UV exposure. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS for product

limitations.

3.05. CLEANING

A. As the Work proceeds, and upon completion, promptly clean up and remove from the

premises all rubbish and surplus materials resulting from the foregoing Work.

B. Clean soiled surfaces, spatters, and damage caused by Work of this Section.

C. Check area to ensure cleanliness and remove debris, equipment, and excess material from

the site.

END OF SECTION




Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 1

SECTION 07 42 13

Metal Screen Wall

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes

1. Factory-formed: exposed-fastener, metal wall panels.

2. Finish must conform to the "Metal Construction Association Certified Premium

Painted™" designation


A. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel”

B. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”

C. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”

D. Division 7 Section “Air Barriers”


A. General: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements

specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those

indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. System shall meet performance criteria as installed. Either test data or signed and sealed

engineering calculations shall document the performance of the panel system to meet design

loads required.

C. Wind Loading: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by wind

pressures as follows:

1. Positive pressure: 39 psf – 40.6 psf normal to panel.

2. Negative pressure: 0 psf normal to panel.





D. Maximum Deflection under Design Loads:

1. 1/180 of span

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's current product specifications and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include small-scale elevations, as required. Show details of trim and

flashing conditions, fastening and anchorage methods, weatherproofing techniques,

terminations, and penetrations.

C. Samples:

1. Selection Samples: Submit actual metal chips with full range of colors available for

Architect's selection.

2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples of each type of metal panel required, not less

than 12 inches (305mm), and illustrating finished panel profile.

D. Product Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports or load tables verifying performance

capability of panel system:

1. Metal Wall Panels: Include reports for UL 790/ASTM E 108, ASTM E 283, ASTM E

331, Field Tested, UL 2218, ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating, Paint Performance Tests.

2. Fastener test and pull-out calculations

3. Load tables

4. Maintenance Data


A. Installer: Company specializing in the type of work required for this project, with not less

than 2 years of documented experience.

B. Pre-Installation meeting: Convene meeting not less than one week prior to beginning

installation between general contractor, installing contractor, owner's representative and

manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and

protection are available.

B. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but

sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective film





to direct sunlight or extreme heat.

C. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal

panel system.

D. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket, the

installer is to examine each shipment for damage and for completion of the consignment.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form in which Wall Installer agrees to repair or

replace components of custom-fabricated sheet metal wall that fail in materials or

workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All panels are to be factory formed and packaged per job

requirements.

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the factory

fabrication of metal wall panels.

2. Manufacturer must be certified to ISO 9001:2008 with design.

B. Specification is based upon the products of ATAS International, Inc. No other manufacturer

of metal wall systems shall be accepted as an alternate product without prior written approval.

These substitution requests must meet specifications and must be submitted a minimum of ten

(10) days prior to date of bid.

C. Coordinate with insulation requirements as noted by Architect.

D. Secondary framing members as required for load criteria and wind requirements.

2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. Exposed-fastener, Lap seam Metal Wall Panels: Provide Factory-formed, designed to be field

assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to

supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weather tight

installation.





B. Ribbed-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels

1. Basis-of Design Product: ATAS International, Inc.; Belvedere™ BWK360

2. Available Manufacturers:

a. ATAS International, Inc.

b. Or, approved equal

3. Profile: Ribbed as indicated on drawings.

4. Material: Metallic coated steel sheet - 24 gauge thick

a. Texture: Perforated, 3⁄8″ holes, 9⁄16″ staggered centers, 40% open area

b. Finish: KYNAR 5000® PDVF or HYLAR 5000® Finish

c. Color: Standard color to be chosen later

4. Panel Coverage: 36"

5. Panel Height: 1-1/2"

6. Panel Application Orientation: Horizontal.

7. Major Rib Spacing: 6"

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Panels:

1. Panels to be Factory fabricated in a controlled environment.

2. Panels to be tension leveled during roll forming process.

3. Panels to be produced in longest lengths possible, except when modular units are utilized.

B. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or

defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings or as required by

field conditions.

C. Accessories: Factory fabricates trim and flashing components in standard 12-foot lengths.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp

and buckle.

2. Fabricate wall panels as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand

design loads.

D. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel

and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.





F. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction

Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements

1. Field measurements should be taken by the installer for verification of dimensional

correctness in relationship to original plans, prior to providing manufacturer with a bill of

material.

B. Delivery, Storage and Handling

1. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage

and protection are available.

2. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but

sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective

film to direct sunlight or extreme heat.

3. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal

panel system.

4. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket,

the installer is to examine each shipment or damage and for completion of the

consignment.

C. Sequencing and Scheduling

1. Installer shall coordinate with general contractor as to scheduled delivery time after

receipt of field verified bill of material by manufacturer as it relates to actual project

scheduling.

3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.

Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal

wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal

and structural movement.

1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.

2. Rigidly fasten metal wall panels and allow for thermal expansion and contraction as

required by the panel manufacturer. Pre-drill panels as required.





3. Install screw fasteners.

4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and

concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing

and material compatibility.

6. Provide weatherproof seals for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of size and length as required for compatibility with substrate.

1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners or metallic coated fasteners for surfaces

exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Exposed fasteners shall have a high performance factory applied coating to match paint

color.

3. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive

substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous

coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other

permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required

for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.

D. Provide water and air infiltration retarder / barriers as noted within project documents.

3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting

and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other

components.

1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,

copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,

and similar items.

2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,

and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA Waterproofing Manual.

Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as

indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight

and weather resistant.

3. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction

Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines.

B. Coordinate with installation of:





1. Cold Formed Metal Framing, as noted in Section 5

2. Rough Carpentry, as noted in Section 6

3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, as noted in Section 7

4. Water and Air Infiltration Retarder / Barriers, as noted in Section 07 27 00

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are

installed. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Protection:

1. Provide as required completed work of this section will be without damager or

deterioration at date of substantial completion.

C. Touch up minor abrasions with matching paint provided by panel manufacturer. Remove and

replace panels that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. See Metal Construction Association

Technical Bulletin #95-1051.

D. Sweep and remove chips, shavings and dust from roof on a daily basis during installation

period. Leave installed work clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. Remove all

protective masking from material immediately after installation of product.

E. Upon completion of installation, remove scraps and debris from project site.

F. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions,

dirt and sealant.





COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 1

SECTION 07 51 13

COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM

PART I – GENERAL




B. Site Specific Projects New construction.

1. Set up and staging areas will be decided upon at the job walk. Roofer will use enclosed

chutes and dumpsters to help minimize debris. New Roofs: Clean deck thoroughly prior

to roofing installation.

2. The roof decks will be inspected by a City Project Manager or site representative and

material manufacturer.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold Process Built-up asphalt roofing system.

2. Remove existing roof system and insulation down to the T & G wood decks on the

Lower and Upper Roof Sections.

3. New metal edging and flashing as required.

4. Remove and Replace all damage or rotted wood decking to match existing in size and

shape.

5. Clean the wood decks of all debris and excess asphalt or adhesives.

6. Remove existing metal curb, and all metal flashing.

7. Install one layer of one half (1”) Tremco Blur Ridge coated fiberboard to the insulation,

with mechanical fasteners to the wood decks, one every 2 square feet.

8. Install one ply of Burmastic Composite Ply HT to the heavy duty coated fiberboard with

PowerPly Cold Adhesive LV. Apply adhesive to fiberboard at a rate of 3½ gallons per

100 square feet.

9. Install two plies of Burmastic Glass (33lb.) to the base layer, with PowerPly Cold

Adhesive LV, at a rate of 3 gallons per 100 square feet.

10. Install. PowerPly Standard FR G24 Membrane to roof system on all elevations, set into

PowerPly Adhesive, at a rate of 2½ gallons per 100 square feet.

11. All parapet, curbs, base, and walls are to be installed with Reinforced TPA Flashing

Membrane to be applied up and over the parapet wall and turned down one-inch past

stucco joint. Membrane to be set into Sheeting Bond Adhesive.

12. Seal edge of flashing with Rock-it Adhesive and two layers of Burmesh Membrane.

Embed into the Rock-it Adhesive a layer of # 11 White Granules.

13. Install new 22-gauge or better metal scuppers to the perimeter of all elevations at existing

locations.

14. Install new TPA Flashing to all drains and scuppers.





15. Install new wood nailers to match the height of the insulation. Wood Nailers to be level

with roof insulation.

16. Termination Bars and sealant tape to be installed at the top of all curbs and boxes.

17. Install new 24-gauge metal or better metal edge to the perimeter of all elevations. Metal

edge to match existing in size and shape.

18, Seal the outside of the scuppers with Tremseal D.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

B. Cold Process Built Up Roofing - An asbestos free formulation of asphalt, solvent, thixotrope,

mineral stabilizer and reinforcing fibers used as an interply adhesive and flood coat.

C. Initial Emittance: Minimum initial emittance of roofing surface (system) threshold in

compliance with Cool Roof Rating Council requirements.

D. Initial Reflectance: Minimum initial reflectance threshold of roofing surface (system) in

compliance with Cool Roof Rating Council requirements.

E. Comply with Title 24, 2007 California Building Energy Standards, Section 118


A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not

permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,

and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based

on testing and field experience.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test- response

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by

UL. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes

indicated.

2. U. L. Class A

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR NONE PRE-APPROVED MATERIALS


B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other Work.





1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.

2. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

3. Insulation fastening patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. 4-by-12-inch square of base sheet.

2. 4-by-12-inch square of ply sheet.

3. 4-by-12-inch square of modified cap sheet.

4. 4-by-12-inch square of roof insulation and cover board.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and manufacturer's technical representative as

specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Indicating compliance of proposed products with requirements,

including:

1. Product Compatibility: Indicate manufacturer has verified compatibility of roofing

system components, including but not limited to: Roofing base and ply sheets, membrane

backer and flashing sheets, reinforcement fabric felts and mats, adhesives, mastics,

coatings, and sealants.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system and system

components.

1. Include report showing compliance with ASTM 2523 load-strain properties requirements.

I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed

roofing installation.

L. Certificate of Insurance showing Products Liability in the amount of $ 10 million minimum and

provide an affidavit signed by a corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $10 million

minimum.

M. Provide certification listing on the current Energy Star® Roof Products Qualifying Products

List.





N. Provide a list often (10) projects available for inspection employing same roof system. Provide

location, contact name, and telephone number.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's warranty.

B. Installer Shall:

1. Submit an affidavit attesting that Contractor has in place and fully implemented a written

Health, Safety and Environmental Plan and the plan is compliant with all applicable

Federal, State and Local regulations. .

2. Be experienced in cold applied roofing applications for 10 years minimum.

3. Be acceptable to Owner.

4. Be a manufacturer Certified Contractor.

5. Not have been in Chapter 7 bankruptcy during the last ten (10) years.

6. Provide a list of ten (10) projects available for inspection employing same roof system.

7. Acquire inspection service days utilizing manufacturer's technical inspectors.

a. The minimum number of full time Technical Consulting Service inspection days

will be Six (6) days for a project of 200 squares or less.

b. The number of days will increase at a rate of two (2) day for each additional 100

squares.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing approval for roofing

system identical to that used for this Project.

D. Manufacturer Shall:

1. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association

(NRCA) for at least five (5) years.

2. Be nationally recognized in the roofing, waterproofing and moisture survey industry.

3. Be approved by Owner.

4. Has not been in Chapter II bankruptcy during the last five (5) years.

5. Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing Products

Liability in the amount of $ 10 million minimum and provide an affidavit signed by a

corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $10 million minimum.

6. Provide a copy of Corporate Health, Safety and Welfare policy.

7. Manufacturer must manufacture a minimum of 70% of the materials that they supply,

by dollar volume, in facilities owned or solely leased by said manufacturer, including

equipment used in manufacturing operations.

8. Provide evidence of twenty (20) quarters of continuous plant inspections of roofing

manufacturing sites over the previous five (5) years by an independent Nationally

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in 29 CPR Ch. XVII (7-1-93 Edition)

from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

9. Be ISO 9001; 2000 registered for at least the prior five (5) years

10. Furnish a service agreement / warranty.





11. Provide Owner names of at least five (5) qualified applicators.

12. Employ full-time Field Technical Services Representatives for daily job-site monitoring

and production of daily reports.

13. Require local Field Representatives to make periodic job-site visits and produce work

quality and progress reports.

14. Provide a Project Closeout Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report to

include:

a. Project Specifications.

b. Project Summary.

c. Progress reports as a result of roof inspections.

d. Job-site progress photos.

e. Warranty document.

f. Owner's Manual describing maintenance and emergency repair.

E. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time employee

representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified

roofing system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this

Project.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved in writing by

roofing system manufacturer.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures

related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck

Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.






A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions

for storage.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored

liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written

instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Tremco QA Plus 20 Year Manufacturer's Warranty and Service Agreement

in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane

accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and termination details.

2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following services in Years 2, 5, 10

and 15:

a. Inspection by a Technical Representative and delivery of a written inspection

report documenting roof conditions.

b. Preventative maintenance and necessary repairs, including splits, tears, or breaks in

the roof membrane system and flashings that threaten the integrity of the roof

system and are not exempt from coverage due to neglect, negligence, vandalism, or

other exclusion.

c. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up, subject to limits, but generally

including removal of incidental debris.

3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this

Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing





system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards,

substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following

warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Technical Instruction and Inspections:

1. Manufacturer shall provide Technical Consulting Instruction and Inspection on the project for

Six (6) days at a cost of $ 800.00 per day.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Built-up Asphalt Roofing;

a. Tremco, Inc.

Contact: Bill Calagna

323-587-3014 or 818-429-2584

2.2 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS

A. Backer Sheet: Tremco Burmastic Composite Ply HT ASTM D 460 I-04, Type II, SBS-modified

asphalt-coated Tri-laminate reinforced high-strength ply sheet, with polyester/glass-

fiber/polyester-reinforcing coated with waterproofing asphalt. Burmastic Composite Ply

Premium Green contains 14-per cent post-industrial recycled content.

1. Weight 38 Ibs/100 sq. ft. ASTM D 228-05

2. Tensile Strength MD 190 lbf/in ASTM D 5147-02

3. Tensile Strength XMD 180 lbf/in ASTM D 5147-02

4. Tear Strength MD 260 lbf ASTM D 5147-02

5. Tear Strength XMD 230 lbf ASTM D 5147-02

2.3 ROOF SURFACING

A. SBS Modified Bitumen Membrane: Tremco Power Standard FR,

glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet.

2.4 INTERPLY MEMBRANES

A. Burmastic Felt Membranes: 33 Pounds

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS:

A. Metal Flashing Sheet: 24 gage galvanized sheet metal.





1. Metal counter flashing.

2. Metal gravel stop.

3. Metal coping.

4. Metal termination bar.

B. Metal edge stripping ply: 2 plies of composite ply.

C. TPA Flashing.

1. TPA Flashing Membrane – Reinforce 0.045 inches thick.

2. Flashing Adhesive – Sheeting Bond Adhesive.

3. Heat Seaming.

4. Termination Mastic – Rock-it Adhesive and Burmesh Membrane.

5. Surface with White # 11 Granules.

2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Primer: Tremco Tremprime WB ASTM D 41.

B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Tremco PowerPly LV standard asphalt-based, I-part asbestos-free,

cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing

membranes and flashings. Each container labeled with UL and FM logos indicating material

was manufactured under the specified UL and FM quality assurance programs.

1. Asbestos Content ASTM D 276 None

2. Viscosity ASTM D 2196 80,000-200,000 cP

3. Density ASTM D 1475 8.2 b/gal

4. VOC ASTM D 3960 Compliant with local building

codes

2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with built-up roofing.

B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing

system manufacturer for application.

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion

resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to

substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing

system manufacturer.

D. Roof Surfacing Material:

1. ICE Coating





2.7 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and

referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thickness indicated.

1. I Inch Coated Fiberboard Insulation

B. Insulation-Board Fasterners:

1. Tremco 1410 Plates and Screws

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

1. Provide positive drainage through entire valley areas.

2. Polyisocyanurate cricket material with 1/2 inch thick cellulosic-fiber covers board. All

crickets and cant strips to be installed with specified Fas N Free solvent free insulation

adhesive.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with membrane roofing per warrantable standards.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof

drains are securely clamped in place and free flowing.

2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent

units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Make sure and protect the inside of the facilities per Districts procedures. Before any re-roofing

can take place, the Districts representative will sign off on the decks and authorize any

replacement per unit costs given by roofer.





B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing

installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp

projections.

C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation

or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch

with insulation.

D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and

does not restrict flow of water.

3.04 WOOD NAILERS and PANELS

A. Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the roof where no vertical wall exists

and around other projections and penetrations that are to be flashed.

B. Nailers new shall be securely anchored to the deck to resist 200 lbs. per foot applied in any

direction.

The thickness of the nailer shall be provided such that the top of the nailer is flush with the surface to

which the TPA membrane is to be applied.

3.05 WOOD NAILERS and PANELS

A. Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the roof where no vertical wall exists

and around other projections and penetrations that are to be flashed.

B. Nailers new shall be securely anchored to the deck to resist 200 lbs. per foot applied in any

direction.

C. The thickness of the nailer shall be provided such that the top of the nailer is flush with the

surface to which the Insulation is to be applied.

3.06 Insulation Attachment

A. Base layer of Insulation:





1. Install with Screws and Plates, one fastener every two square feet.

3.07 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials in compliance with

requirements in Roofing Manufacturer’s Guide.

C. Install roofing system in accordance with the following NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA

recommendations; modify as required to comply with requirements of references above:

1. Metal Parapet Cap (Coping) and Base Flashing: Plates BUR-I and BUR-I S.

2. Embedded Edge Metal Flashing: Plates BUR-3 and BUR-3S.

3. Surface-mount Counter flashing: Plates BUR-4 and BUR-4S.

4. Base Flashing for Wall Supported Deck: Plates BUR-5 and BUR-5S.

5. Base Flashing for Vented Base Sheet: Plates BUR-SA and BUR-5AS.

6. Expansion Joint with Metal Cover: Plates BUR-7 and BUR-7S.

7. Expansion Joint with Pre-Manufactured Cover: Plates BUR-7A and BUR-7AS.

8. Equipment Support Curb: Plates BUR-9 and BUR-9S.

9. Equipment Support Stand with Typical Rain Collar: Plates BUR-II and BUR-II S.

10. Raised Curb Detail: Plates BUR-13 and BUR-13S.

11. Skylight, Scuttle, and Smoke Vent: Plates BUR-I 4 and BUR 14S.

12. Isolated Stack Flashing: Plates BUR-17A and BUR-17AS.

13. Plumbing Vent: Plates BUR-I 8 and BUR-18S.

14. Penetration Pocket: BUR-I 9 andBUR-19S.

15. Roof Drain: BUR-20 andBUR-20S.

16. Gutter: BUR-22 and BUR-22S.

D. Start installation of built-up roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's

technical personnel. Roofing contractor must have approval from Material Manufacturer and

District to begin.

E. Where roof slope exceeds 2 inches per 12 inches, install sheets of built-up roofing membrane

parallel with slope.

1. Back nail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system

manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for

installing built-up roofing system.

G. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation and roofing membrane sheets

are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is

forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and

insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with

joints and edges sealed.





2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water

from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

H. Cold Process Asphalt Heating

1. An in-line heat exchange unit may be used to facilitate application.

a. Do not exceed maximum adhesive temperature of 1000 F.

2. Heat exchange unit: Use heat transfer oil approved by heating equipment manufacturer.

3. Follow operation procedures recommended by heating equipment manufacturer.

I. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering

building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.

3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

1A. Install base sheet to Coated Fiberboard Insulation ½ Inch Board with adhesive at a rate of 3½

gallons per 100 square feet.

B. Install two base sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align sheets without stretching.

Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout

thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and

terminate beyond cants.

1. Cut plies in 18'-20' lengths maximum and allow to relax.

2. Embed each ply sheet in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at rate of 2½ gallons per

I00 sq. ft. to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.

C. Surface Membrane: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system.

Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in

direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Embed cap sheet in a solid application of PowerPly Cold Adhesive at a rate required

by roofing system manufacturer. Application Rate is 2½ gallons per 100 sq. ft.

2. Side and end laps to be sealed by applying heat seaming method.

D. Embed # 11 White Granules into all excessive adhesive and at all three or five course applications.

3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and

at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system

manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.

2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere

backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in flashing adhesive.





3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere to backer sheet in flashing adhesive.

B. Extend base flashing up walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6 inches

onto field of roofing membrane.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.

1. At parapets walls, extend flashing sheet up entire wail and mechanically fasten at outside

edge of nailer below coping cap.

2. At high parapet walls, extend flashing sheet up wall 8-12 inches above roofing membrane

and secure edge with butyl TF sealant tape and termination bar fastened at 8 inches OIC.

3. Install 24 gauge. Galvanized metal counter flashing at all vertically terminated base

flashings.

4. For existing roofs (as applicable): Architect/District verify the following existing

condition(s): On all parapet walls that are not wrapped with base flashing, prime and

install two coats of Tremco Wall-Tite White Elastomeric Coating.

D. Install 4 inch and 6-inch stripping plies where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up

roofing.

1. Set in flashing adhesive.

E. Install all edge metal, metal counter flashing, and metal coping according to NRCA details and

industry standards and manufacturers warrantable details.

F. Pipe penetrations: Install split lead flashing and strip in edges same as metal edges.

G. Irregular penetrations: Use Chem. Curb flashing component system. Must be approved by

material manufacturer first.

H. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch 4 lb. lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on

completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4

inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane.

Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.

I. Install stripping of not less than two roofing membrane ply sheets, each set in a continuous

coating of asphalt roofing cement.

J. Install new reinforced hypalon, lead jack or sheet metal flashing to all pipes and penetrations, as

required by roofing manufacturer. Seal penetration with a counter flashing umbrella, TF-Tape,

and clamping ring.

K. Install new reinforced hypalon, lead jack or sheet metal flashing to all pipes and penetrations, as

required by roofing manufacturer. Seal penetration with a counter flashing umbrella, TF-Tape,

and clamping ring.

L. Install Reinforced TPA Flashing to all perimeter walls, base, and curb flashing; install batten bars

and flashing tape to middle of walls greater than 12" in height. Install batter bars/termination bars

at the top of all base or curb flashing, with TF-Tape, and secure to wall with fasteners.





M. Install reinforced TPA Flashing up and over the parapet wall, and nail to wood nailer on the

outside.

N. Install new batten bars to middle of TPA Sheeting with mechanical fasteners and two sided sealant-

tape.

O. Install reinforced TPA Flashing around all new TPA metal scuppers.

P. Elastomeric Flashing:

1. Adhere elastomeric sheeting completely to flashing surface, cant, and roofing with

flashing adhesive. After application of adhesive, allow adhesive to remain open for 15

minutes minimum to flash off solvent prior to setting elastomeric sheeting into flashing

adhesive.

2. Apply consistent pressure to entire surface of elastomeric sheeting using a steel hand

roller to achieve full adhesion of the sheet to the flashing substrate. Ensure complete

bond and continuity without wrinkles or voids.

3. Lap sheeting ends 4 inches. Fully heat weld flashing laps.

4. Elastomeric sheeting width: Sufficient to extend at least 6 inches beyond toe of cant onto

new roof.

5. Seal vertical and horizontal edges of sheeting with reinforcing membrane embedded in a

base course of flashing adhesive and a top course of Modified Asphalt Mastic.

Q. Hot air heat welding of TPA:

1. Wipe both sides of lap surfaces to be joined with toluene solvent.

2. Adjust welding equipment air temperature prior to start. Utilize steel roller or weighted

wheel on automatic welding equipment to provide pressure on lap area during heat

welding.

3. Maintain air nozzle temperature, nozzle speed, and lap pressure when joining laps

together.

4. Test lap areas to assure proper bonding. Remove lap sample from the roof. When lap

sample is cool, pull test lap apart. When torn, the reinforcing scrim should become

exposed. Patch test areas with new TPA of the same color and style, using a minimum 2"

lap area.

R. On curb details, plies will extend 2" above cants. Reinforced TPA Sheeting will be set in Sheeting

Bond and nailed inside wood nailer 6" on center. The outside edge of Sheet will be

5-coursed with Burmesh Membrane and Rock-it Adhesive and surfaced with White #11

Granules. Flashing seams shall be with heat seaming or Lap Adhesive Install TF-Tape to

both sides of the TPA Flashing at the Termination Bars.

S. On wall details, plies will extend 2" above cants. Reinforced TPA Sheeting will be set in

butyl-based adhesive or Sheeting Bond onto roof surface 6" and up wall under flashing

metal and fastened to nailer 12" on center. The outside edges of the plies of sheeting will

be 5-coursed with Burmesh Membrane and Rock-it Adhesive and surfaced with White

#11 Granules. Install TF-Tape to both sides of the TPA Flashing at the Termination

Bars.

3.10 SURFACING OF SYSTEM

1. Allow the system to cure for a minimum of 30 days.

2. Clean the roof surface of all debris and dirt.

3. Apply base application of ICE Coating at a rate of 1½ to 2 Gallons per 100 square feet.





4. Apply top application of ICE Coating at a rate of 1½ to 2 Gallons per 100 square feet.

5. Allow to cure 24 to 48 hours prior to foot traffic.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect or Owner.

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and

Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements,

repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. Make

sure all drains .are free flowing.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. Coat all projections, foot marks, or

bleed through with specified white on white adhesive.

END OF SECTION




SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.

2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that

apply to work under this Section.

B. Section Includes:

1. Flashing and sheet metal work.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel.

3. Division 06 Section “Finish Carpentry”

4. Division 07 Section "Air Barrier” and “Joint Sealers".

5. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".

6. Division 09 Section "Painting".

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:

1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where

differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall

apply.

2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of

commencement of the Work.

3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable regulatory

requirements.

B. BAAQMD Regulation 8-51 - Adhesive and Sealant Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

B. Product Data:

1. Specifications, materials list and schedule for surface preparation procedures.

2. Material safety data sheets.

C. Shop Drawings: Details showing each condition separately and cross-referenced with applicable

details on the Drawings.





D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Material Safety Data: Sealant and adhesive quantity use in accordance with requirements of

BAAQMD Regulation 8-51.

2. Signed guaranty.


A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," latest

edition, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

B. Take field measurements required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation of the work.

Exact measurements are the Subcontractor's responsibility. Furnish templates for exact locations of

items to be embedded.

1.5 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee sheet metal and flashing work provided under this section to be watertight for 5 years

after substantial completion. Guarantee shall include that other work and materials damaged by

leaks shall be promptly repaired at no cost to University.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Galvanized Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:

1. Fry Reglet Corporation.

2. Heckmann Building Products Inc.

3. Hickman, W. P. Company.

4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.

5. Or equal.

B. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process

and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural

quality.

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,

Grade 40; structural quality.

3. Surface: Smooth, flat and mill phosphatized for field painting.

4. Color: As selected by Architect.





2.2 MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish sheet metal in minimum 20-gauge, except 24-gauge for downspouts and gutters, or

as otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise noted, all sheet metal shall be galvanized, FS QQ-S-775d,

Class d, ASTM A525 Class 1.25 commercial galvanizing.

1. Pre-manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two piece flashing, metal to match flashing and

sheet metal, factory formed and sealed corners. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System, MM

Systems Corp./Snap-Tite System, Morrison & Co./Cushion-lok, or equal.

2. Pre-manufactured Roof Curbs: Box section design, custom heights, minimum 16 gage

galvanized steel, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, single and

compound roof pitch requirements, combustible materials and wood of any kind are not

permitted. Custom Curb, Inc. (800-251-3001), Roof Products & Systems Corp. (708-595-

7320), or equal.

B. Lead: ASTM B749, Type L51121, minimum 4 lbs./sq. ft. (0.0625 inches thick).

C. Solder: For use with steel or copper, Class A, Grade I, half-and-half, pig lead and block tin, ASTM

B32, Type 50-50, with rosin flux.

1. For use with stainless steel, 60-40 tin/lead solder, ASTM B32, with acid-chloride flux, except

use rosin flux over tinned surfaces.

D. Mastic: FS SS-S-153, Type 1, black plastic cement.

E. Nails and Screws: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as

recommended by sheet manufacturer, Stronghold type, with large flat heads and sharp points. Use

length sufficient to penetrate wood framing a minimum of 7/8-inch (22 mm). Use lead or neoprene

washers where indicated. Use sheet metal screws or self-tapping screws to fasten sheet metal to

other metal. Match finish of exposed heads with finish of material being fastened.

F. Lap Joint Sealer: Polyisobutylene non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.

G. Coating for Dissimilar Metals: Bitumastic paint or as required to be compatible with adjacent

materials and finishes. Coordinate requirements with paint systems and coatings furnished under

Division 09 Section "Painting".

H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound recommended by

metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.

I. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weatherproof

seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.

J. Paper Slip-Sheet: 5-lb (2.27 kg) rosin-sized building paper.

K. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film.

L. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as

required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-

corrosive, size and gage as required for performance.





M. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards: 20-gauge bronze or nonmagnetic stainless steel mesh or

fabricated units, with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Use materials compatible with

gutters and downspouts.

N. Other materials are described under Part 3, Execution.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Review drawings for sheet metal work. Coordinate to achieve proper incorporation of this work

within membrane waterproofing work.

3.2 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. Fabricate shapes as detailed and approved.

C. Accurately fabricate and fit parts, with surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, dent or other defects,

and with square corners and angles, unless otherwise shown.

D. Install water and weather tight where exposed to the weather, with the provision for free expansion

and contraction without causing leaks.

E. Clean soldered surfaces prior to soldering. Fully flow soldered joints fully. Scrape and finish

exposed solder smooth. Remove traces of flux or acid.

F. Provide locked-butt joints. Where impractical and unless otherwise detailed, provide joints with full

backup strips, riveted to one end and soldered; lap other end and seal with lap joint sealer. Turn lock

joints, where exposed, in direction of flow.

1. Solder joints and miters.

2. Make ample provisions for expansion and contraction in sheet metal assemblies, and provide

by slip joints. In long runs, provide slip joints every 20 feet (6 m) minimum, unless

otherwise shown on Drawings. In runs less than 20 feet (6 m), provide one slip joint.

3. Provide reinforcements as required.

4. Shop fabricate corners at parapet wall copings with miters and all joints soldered.

G. Exposed fasteners are not permitted.

H. Provide heavy coating of bitumastic paint to insulate dissimilar metals from each other.

I. Fold, bead, hem or return exposed edges of fabricated sheetmetal; no raw edges will be permitted.

J. Close all ends.

K. Etch sheet metal surfaces which will be concealed in the finish work with an approved acid wash,

and then shop paint with one coat of approved galvanized primer. Sheet metal surfaces which will





be exposed in the finished work are specified to be treated and prime-painted under Division 09

Section "Painting".

1. Confirm compatibility of shop primers and surface preparation used on concealed surfaces

with paints and coatings provided in Division 09 Section "Painting".

L. Underlayment: Where stainless steel is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates,

install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

M. Install continuous gutter guards on gutters, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning

gutters. Install "beehive"-type strainer guards at conductor heads, removable for cleaning

downspouts.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Immediately upon completion of this work, remove from site all debris and scrap material and clean

up all dust and dirt resulting from this work.

END OF SECTION


Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents

FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Firestopping systems.

B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant

assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.


1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. See Drawings for additional requiremnts for firestopping. Where drawings and this section

conflicts, drawings to govern.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,

and firestopping test or design number.

C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information



A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated.

1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.

2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at

www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.




3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above

substantiation exists.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.

2. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.

3. Approved by firestopping manufacturer

D. Products to conform with SCAQMD VOC levels.


A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after

installation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested

assembly design.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.

1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that

has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating

and that meets all other specified requirements.

B. Acceptable manufacturers providing code approved systems:

1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.

2. Bio Fireshiel, www.bioshield.com.

3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hiltLcom.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING; GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the

substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions




of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing

and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use

only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified

testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.

C. Firestopping Materials are either "cast-in-place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post

installed." Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

2.4 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.

B. Fire Ratings: Use only those systems listed by UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) or tested in

accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and

minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.

END OF SECTION




JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 1

SECTION 07 90 05

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Based on ASTM C 920 Substrates:

1. M type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The

term "masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work.

2. G type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets.

3. A type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics.

4. 0 type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,

substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.

C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating sealant colors for selection.

D. Color selection: Color selection shall be made from manufacturers standard color selection.

Selection shall be made by Architect.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.




A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in






C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years of experience.


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound

(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168.

B. Type SJ-1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.

1. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.

b. Joints between concrete and other materials.

c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.

d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

C. Type SJ-2 - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Multi-component self-leveling polyurethane

sealant, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.

1. Size as indicated on drawings, if not detailed, then per manufacturer's recommendation to

provide weathertight seal when installed.

2. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use.


a. Exterior horizontal joints in concrete flatwork and extruded curbs.

D. Type SJ-3 - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses NT, A, G;

single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding.

1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.

2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent.

3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F.

4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35






a. Glazing at aluminum frames.

E. Type SJ-4 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: One-part non-sag silyl terminated polyether

sealant: ASTM C-920, Type S. Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, G, A, O.


a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.

F. Type SJ-5 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP,

Grade NF single component, paintable.

1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.


a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.

b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.

c. Interior joint sealant between window frames and wall or curb below

d. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

G. Type SJ-6 - BathtublTile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single

component, mildew resistant.


a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.

b. Joints between countertops with faucets and wall surfaces and backsplash.

H. Type SJ-7 - Acoustical Sealant: Non-skinning, sound dampering; single component, solvent

release curing, non-skinning.

1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:

a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track

and floor.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM 0 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; Backer Rod manufactured by Backer Rod

Manufacturing, Inc., Denver, CO.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave.

H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and

intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

I. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints

with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type SJ-2.

B. Joints Between Concrete Panels and Between Panels and Adjacent Work: Type SJ-1.





C. Control Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work:

Type SJ-1.

D. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type SJ-4.

E. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type SJ-1.

F. Joints Between Interior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type SJ-5.

G. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type SJ-4.

H. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type SJ-5; None; N/A.

I. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type SJ-2.

J. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls:

Type SJ-6.

K. In Sound Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Type SJ-

7.

END OF SECTION




HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.

B. Steel frames for wood doors.

C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy

of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and

identifying location of different finishes, if any.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special

installation instructions relating to this project.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products including STC rating of sound doors meet

or exceed specified requirements.





A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in


B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.





1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGEM AND HANDLING

A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Doors and Frames:

1. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. (Basis of Design)

2. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.

3. Door Components Inc.; www.doorcomponents.com


2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Requirements for Doors and Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with CBSC 2016.

2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.

3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.

4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.

5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded

in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

6. Galvanizing for exterior units: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for

instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the

requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements

conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.3 STEEL DOORS

A. Exterior Doors: 16 GA L Series Doors by Steelcraft

1. Grade: ANSI A250.11 Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.

2. Core: 1” cell, 99 pound Kraft Honeycomb core

3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.70, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1363.

B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 18 L Series Doors by Steelcraft


2. Core: 1” cell, 99 pound Kraft Honeycomb core.





3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 18 L Series Doors by Steelcraft


2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C

("positive pressure").

a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.

b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

3. Core: As required to meet Fire-Rated assembly.

2.4 STEEL FRAMES

A. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:

a. ANSI A250.11: 18 gage frames.

b. ANSI A250.11: 16 gage frames.

c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI

A250.8 for Level 2

2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,

flush with top.

4. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and

overhead structure.

B. Exterior Door Frames: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth.

1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating.

2. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth.

D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth. 1. Fire

Rating: Same as door, labeled.

E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.1 0, door manufacturer's standard.

B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

C. Colors and coating to match custom samples provided by the Architect.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in concrete or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM

HMMA840.

B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.

C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

D. Coordinate installation of hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

F. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.

C. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with ASTM E1408;

adjust as required to comply.

END OF SECTION




FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 1

SECTION 08 14 29

PREFINISHED WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-core doors.


1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" steel door frames.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers,

and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of flush wood door work prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those

on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware

blocking; and other pertinent data.

b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame.

c. Indicated hardware group.

d. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

e. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

f. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for

the following:

1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained

finishes.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for

each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of

three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished

work.





2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings

representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber

required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

3. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each

color, texture, and pattern selected.

4. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.

5. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Reference Standards:

1. 2010 Building Standards Administrative Code, Part 1, CBSC.

2. 2010 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, CBSC (2009 IBC & California

Amendments).

3. 2010 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, CBSC (2008 National Electrical Code &

California Amendments).

4. 2010 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, CBSC (2009 Uniform Mechanical

Code & California Amendments).

5. 2010 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, CBSC (2009 Uniform Plumbing Code &


6. 2010 California Energy Code, Part 6, CBSC.

7. 2010 California Historical Building Code, Part 8, CBSC.

8. 2010 California Fire Code, Part 9, CBSC (2009 International Fire Code & California

Amendments).

9. 2010 California referenced Standards, Part 12 CBSC.

10. Title 8 C.C.R. Chapter 4, Sub-Ch. 6 – Elevator Safety Orders.

11. Title 19 C.C.R., Public Safety, SFM Regulations.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

1. Performance duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.

2. Factory machined for door hardware and high density hardware blocking.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.






A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work

is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and

Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in

materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-

inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a

3-inch span.

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair

or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty:

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flush Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product

or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Signature Series by Marshfield Door Systems. (Basis of Design)

2. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.

3. Buell Door Company.

4. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. (Basis of Design - Acoustical Doors)

5. Maiman Company.

6. Marlite.

7. VT Industries Inc.

8. Haley Brothers, Inc.

9. Or equal.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).

2. Species and Cut: Zebrawood Veneer, Quartered.

3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions.





2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Core:

1. Stave Lumber Core: May be a combination of solid, low-density hardwood lumber

blocks or strips not more than 2-1/2" wide of one species of wood between 6% to 9%

moisture content. Joints to be tight and staggered in adjacent rows. Lumber density is 25

to 27 lbs. per cubic foot.

B. Doors:

1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering.

C. Veneer-Faced Doors:

1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,

DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and

alignment before factory machining.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces,

and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of

rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails.

Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door

frames.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of

referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after manufacturing has been

completed.

1. Flash top of out swinging doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain

(if required).





2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors

indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Effect: Open-grain finish.

5. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written

instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-

rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8

inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold

is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.





3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors

may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of

repair or refinishing.





BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 1

SECTION 08 14 76

BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-core, bifolding wood doors.


1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" steel door frames.

2. Division 8 Section "Prefinished Wood Doors".

3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware".

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. NFPA 80: Standard Methods for builders’ hardware to be used in fire rated swing doors.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL10B: Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Note: Neutral pressure standard).

2. UL 10C: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door, submit door manufacturer current product literature,

including installation instruction. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and

trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of bifolding wood door work prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those

on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware

blocking; and other pertinent data.

b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame.

c. Indicated hardware group.

d. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

e. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

f. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for

the following:





1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained

finishes.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for

each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of

three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished

work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings

representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber

required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

3. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each

color, texture, and pattern selected.

4. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.

5. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.



1. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

1. Performance duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.

2. Factory machined for door hardware and high density hardware blocking.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Deliver doors, materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers with identification labels intact.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings

D. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work

is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.





1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and

Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in

materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-

inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a

3-inch span.

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair

or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty:

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. BifoldingWood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named

product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. ProCore Solid Core by Jeld-Wen, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Or equal.

2.2 BIFOLD DOORS

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).

2. Species and cut: Maple, quarter sawn

3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.

C. Flush Doors

1. Core:

a. Stave Lumber Core: May be a combination of solid, low-density hardwood lumber

blocks or strips not more than 2-1/2" wide of one species of wood between 6% to

9% moisture content. Joints to be tight and staggered in adjacent rows. Lumber

density is 25 to 27 lbs. per cubic foot.

2. Doors:

a. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire

unit abrasive planed before veneering.

3. Veneer-Faced Doors:

a. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire

unit abrasive planed before veneering.





2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,

DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and

alignment before factory machining.

2.4 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain

(if required).

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors

indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Effect: Open-grain finish.

5. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough

opening conditions are within recommended tolerances

B. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Trim bottom

of jamb sides to achieve desired distance between door bottom and finished floor height.

a. Reject doors with defects.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.





3.2 BIFOLD DOOR INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written

instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors:

1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do

not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for

hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

2. Fasten overhead track in center of finished opening by inserting screws through pre-

drilled holes.

3. Attach jamb brackets flush to finished floor in line with overhead track.

D. Install door assemblies.

1. Place pivot pin in hole at top corner bracket and place guide wheel in track.

2. Lift door assembly and drop bottom pin into bottom bracket hole.

E. Check positioning and operation. Adjust hardware if necessary

F. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch

from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or

scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.

G. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

H. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors

may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of

repair or refinishing.





ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 1

SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Architectural Aluminum Windows including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims

and anchors, and perimeter sealing of window units.

2. Types of aluminum windows include:

a. Horizontal Sliding Window


1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


2. 062000 “Finish Carpentry”

3. 071353 “Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing”

4. 072100 “Thermal Insulation”

5. 076200 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”

6. 0792050 “Joint Sealers”

7. 088003 “Glazing”

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural

Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed window system shall withstand the effects of the

following performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,

installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Window Performance Requirements:

1. Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance indicated that

comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS)

2. Air Leakage: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. The air

leakage rate shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ft2 (1.5 L/s·m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.2

psf (300 PA).

3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 and

ASTM E 547. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static air pressure

differential of 10 psf (479 Pa).

4. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of 70 psf (3352 Pa) shall

be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall

be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.





5. Uniform Load Structural Test: A minimum static air pressure difference of 105 psf (5027 Pa)

shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. The

unit shall be evaluated after each load.

6. Component Testing: Window components shall be tested in accordance with procedures

described in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS).

7. Energy Efficiency:

a. Thermal Transmittance Test: (U-Factor): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503,

the conductive thermal transmittance (U-Factor) shall not be more than:

1) U-factor not more than .55 BTU/hr/sf/°F per AAMA 507 or NFRC 100 when using

project specified glass.

b. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the

condensation resistance factor shall not be less than (CRF) 50frame and 61glass (clear).

or

Temperature Index (I): When tested to CSA-A440-00, the Temperature Index shall not be

less than (I) 38.2frame and 61.2glass (clear).

8. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM

E 1886 and information in ASTM E 1996 and TAS 201/203.

a. Large – Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of

grade.

b. Small – Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located above 30 feet (9.1 m) of

grade.

9. Blast Mitigation Performance: Shall be tested or proven through analysis to meet ASTM

F1642, GSA-TS01, and UFC 04-010.01 performance criteria.

To meet UFC 04-010.01, B-3.1 Standard 10 for Windows and Skylights, the following options

are available:

a. Section B-3.1.1 Dynamic analysis

b. Section B-3.1.2 Testing

c. Section B-3.1.3 ASTM F2248 Design Approach

10. Forced Entry Resistance: All windows shall conform to ASTM F588, Grade 10.

11. Thermal Barrier Tests: Testing shall be in general accordance with AAMA 505 Dry Shrinkage

and Composite Thermal Cycling test procedure, AAMA TIR-A8, Structural Performance of

Composite Thermal Barrier systems.

12. Sound: Testing per AAMA 1801 with 1" [25.4 mm] insulating glass made with (1/4" [6.35

mm] exterior with, 1/2" [12.7 mm] airspace, 1/4" [6.35 mm] interior): minimum (34 STC) and

(29 OITC).

13. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Shall have a Type III Product Specific EPD

created from a Product Category Rule specific to North America.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions

of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type

of aluminum window indicated.

1. Recycled Content:





a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer

recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product

included in project.

c. Indicate location recovery of recycled content.

d. Indicate location of manufacturing facility.

2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD):

a. Include a Type II Product-Specific EPD created from a Product Category Rule specific to

North America.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,

operational clearances and installation details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of

hardware and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required.

E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing

agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of

downsized test units will not be accepted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product:

1. Series 6555 (3-7/8”) Horizontal Sliding Window by EFCO or approved equal

A. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements.

1. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid

date.

2. Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in order to avoid

window installation and construction delays.

3. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit

specific project requirements and job conditions.

4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence

to specification requirements for window system performance criteria, and (2) has been

engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum windows for a period of not

less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)

5. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by

the project.

6. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's

standard sizes.





2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for

strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" (1.78 mm)

wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.

1. Recycled Content: Shall have a minimum of 50% mixed pre- and post-consumer recycled

content.

B. Thermal Barrier:

1. Thermal Barrier: The thermal barrier shall be a nominal 3/8" (9.53 mm) separation consisting

of a two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane which is mechanically and

adhesively bonded to the aluminum.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and

compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or

iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength

to withstand design pressure indicated.

E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel

complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron

complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to

withstand design pressure indicated.

F. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's

standard, permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant

manufacturer for joint size and movement.

2.3 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section “Glazing” for glass units and glazing

requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.

B. Glazing System: Glazing method shall be a wet/dry type in accordance with manufacturer’s

standards. Exterior glazing shall be silicone back bedding sealant. Interior glazing shall be snap-in

type glazing beads with an interior gasket in accordance with AAMA 702 or ASTM C864.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or

other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly

close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and

dimensions.

B. Horizontal Sliding Window Typical Hardware:

1. Steel Roller Assembly

2. Aluminum auto lock

C. Interior Trims: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, extruded to profiles and details

indicated. Seal exterior joints with manufacturer's standard sealant to assure water-tight joints.

1. Interior Trims: The interior face trim minimum wall thickness shall be 0.062" (1.57 mm). The

face trim shall snap-fit onto concealed mounting clip. Exposed fasteners shall not be accepted.

The mounting clip shall be extruded aluminum of 6063-T6 alloy and temper. The minimum





wall thickness shall be 0.062" (1.57 mm). The trim clips shall be provided in 4" (101.6 mm)

lengths and spaced a maximum of 18" (457.2 mm) center to center.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior.

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain

required glazing edge clearances.

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent

possible.

B. Window Frame Joinery: Screw-spline, factory sealed frame and vent corner joints.

C. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling

components and anchoring windows.

D. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or framing.

E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with

anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and

provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as

indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.

F. Sub frames: Provide sub frames with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions

indicated but not less than 0.093" (2.4 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and

join with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide sub frames

capable of withstanding design loads of window units.

G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible

for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing” and with

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 (NAFS).

H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section “Glazing” and

glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match frame.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.

1. Factory Finishing: Fluoropolymer Coating, color to be selected by the Architect





PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experiences with installation of the

same or similar units required for this project and other projects of similar size and scope.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet

or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion

of test reports, and calculations.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum

windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product

Requirements.” Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's

approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect

for review.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present,

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational

clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in

components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight window installation.

1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.

2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints.

Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm)

of opening.

3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without

sharp edges or offsets at joints.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing

windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install aluminum-framed window system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or

impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper

relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.

D. Install aluminum-framed window system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating

joints, and moisture migrating within system to the exterior.





E. Separate aluminum from dissimilar material to prevent corrosion or electrolytic action at points of

contact.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work

complies with or deviates from requirements.

2. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:

3. Testing Methodology: Testing Standard shall be per AAMA 502 including reference to ASTM

E 783 for Air Leakage Test and ASTM E 1105 for Water Penetration Test.

a. Air Leakage Test: Conduct test in accordance with ASTM E 783 at a minimum uniform

static test pressure of 6.2 psf (300 Pa). The maximum allowable rates of air leakage for

field testing shall not exceed 1.5 times the project specifications.

b. Water Infiltration Test: Water penetration resistance tests shall be conducted in accordance

with ASTM E 1105 at a static test pressure equal to 2/3 the specified water test pressure.

4. Testing Extent: Architect shall select window units to be tested as soon as a representative

portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for

air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present.

5. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502.

3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and

weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving

parts.

B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective

coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Clean glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean

surfaces.

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during

construction period.

E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and

masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other

contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants

immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION




DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Door hardware.

2. Third-party inspection report for fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.

B. Related Divisions:

1. Division 06 – door hardware installation

2. Division 07 – sealant at exterior thresholds

3. Division 08 – metal doors and frames, wood doors.

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.

1. Windows.

2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.

3. Signs.

4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars.

5. Installation.

6. Rough hardware.

7. Corner Guards.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.

1. American National Standards Institute

a) ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes.

2. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

3. 2016 California Building Code

a) Chapter 11B – Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public

Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing

4. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute

5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

a) NFPA 80 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening

Protectives.

b) NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

c) NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

6. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

a) UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

b) UL 305 – Panic Hardware

7. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code





8. Local applicable codes

9. SDI – Steel Door Institute

10. WI – Woodwork Institute

11. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute

12. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

B. Abbreviations

1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section

2. Finishes: see 2.7 of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per D. Only submittals printed one sided

will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware

Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item

required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include following

information:

1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.

2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.

3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.

4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.

6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

7. Mounting locations for hardware.

8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.

9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and

phone number.

10. Catalog cuts.

B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.

C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of Finish

Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating

from this section.

D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more

expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction

from Architect for resolution.

E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project.

Furnish operating samples on request.

F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet

existing standard.

G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying

schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation,

adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualifications:





1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified

architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during

course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and

Contractor.

a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and

complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.

B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware

(latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.

C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special

knowledge or effort.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure)

compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching

hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals.

Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings

complete.

E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified

performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and

code requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).

1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s representative.

B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers,

complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate

contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.

C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture,

sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:

A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of

members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the

same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.

B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper

design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar

requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of

omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades

with the following information:

1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.

2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.

3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.





4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal

supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or

foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for

continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers,

coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place,

the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the

installer’s bits.

5. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at out swinging exteriors, and throughout

where adhesive-mounted seals occur.

6. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.

C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will

be made for proper hardware installation.

D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product

packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ written

warranties.

B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents to validate warranty

information, required for Owner in making future warranty claims:

C. Minimum warranties:

1. Locksets: Three years

2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock: Ten Years

3. Exit Devices: Three years

4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical

5. Hinges: One year

6. Other Hardware Two years

1.8 COMMISSIONING:

A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:

1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system

and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: these will be considered; submit for review

products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products.

ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE

ALTERNATE:

Hinges (IVE) Ives Bommer

Key System (SCH) Schlage Owner standard

Mechanical Locks (SCH) Schlage Owner standard

Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin Owner standard

Closers (LCN) LCN Owner standard

Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson ABH

Thresholds (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese

Seals & Bottoms (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese

2.2 HINGING METHODS:

A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees. Doors will actually swing to maximum

allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches

in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise

architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions,

weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s

standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices. Notify

Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.

C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless-steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open

widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.

1. Out swinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and

security studs.

2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric

conditions.





2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:

A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.

1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.

2. Universal lock case – 10 functions in one case.

3. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge.

4. Latchbolts: 0.75 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.

5. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar

type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.

a) Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside

lever does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful

entry.

b) Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no exposed trim

mount screws.

c) Levers rotate up or down for ease of use.

d) Vandalgard locks: locked lever freely rotates down while remaining

securely locked. This feature prevents damage to internal lock

components when subjected to excessive force.

6. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of

mortise cylinder.

7. Turnpieces: accessible offset turn-lever design not requiring pinching or twisting

motions to operate.

8. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.

9. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction,

lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.

10. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 06A design.

11. Certifications:

a) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational.

b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.

12. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or

both, per CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.

13. Accepted substitutions: None.

B. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.

1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-

bolted.

2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design.

3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated

steel, or stainless steel.

4. Latchbolt: solid steel.

5. Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame,

door or other hardware.

6. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported,

minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to door face.

7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1.00 inch deep box

construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.

8. Lock Series and Design: Schlage D series, “Rhodes” design.





9. Certifications:

a) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1.

b) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8 feet.

10. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or

both, per CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.


2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE

A. General features:

1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.

2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed

cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming

dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.

3. Deadlocking latchbolts, 0.75 inch projection.

4. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts

or other equipment.

5. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.

6. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all

functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function.

7. Releasable in normal operation with 15-pound maximum operating force per

UBC Standard 10-4, and with 32-pound maximum pressure under 250-pound

load to the door.

8. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt, per CBC 2016

11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.

a) Mechanical method: Von Duprin “AX-“ feature, where touchpad directly

retracts the latchbolt with 5 lb or less of force. Provide testing lab

certification confirming that the mechanical device is independent third-

party tested to meet this 5 lb requirement.

B. Specific features:

1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: hex key dogging.

2. Lever Trim: breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min. 0.13 inch

thickness, compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.

3. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices

less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.


2.5 CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: 4040XP

1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast

iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-

silicon steel spring.

2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.

3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.





4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and

rooms.

5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular

header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.

6. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior

doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2016 California Building

Code Section 11B-404.2.9, local authority may increase the allowable pressure

for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds.

a) Exception: exterior doors’ pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-

pounds if: at a single location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction

of eight, and one leaf of this bank is fitted with a low- or high-energy

operator.

7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth

valve for delayed action where scheduled.

8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.

9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish

data on request.

10. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120

degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.

11. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.

12. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.


2.6 OTHER HARDWARE

A. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable

hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

B. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as

scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.

C. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate

fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be

used, provide overhead type.

2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for

furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of

opening in submittal.

D. Seals: Four-fingered type at head & jambs. Inelastic, rigid back, not subject to stretching.

Self-compensating for warp, thermal bow, door settling, and out-of-plumb. Adhesive

warranted for life of installation.

1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.

2. Three-fingered type at hinge jambs of doors fitted with continuous hinges where

jamb leaf of hinge is fastened to the frame reveal.

E. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC 2016 11B-404.2.5.

Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s

thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.

1. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness.





2. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with

requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch

diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or

approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. National Guard Products’

“COMBO” or Pemko Manufacturing’s “FHSL”.

3. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor

covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value

less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as

scheduled. If none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and

request direction from Architect.

4. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full

jamb depth.

5. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for

specified fastening methods.

6. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned

TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be

slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length

to prevent door compression.

F. Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of proper

blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers.

Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper reinforcement to

support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers.

1. Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays.

2.7 FINISH:

A. Generally: BHMA 626 Satin Chromium.

1. Areas using BHMA 626: furnish push-plates, pulls and protection plates of

BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled.

B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Key System: Schlage Primus Classic 3G high-security utility-patented keyway,

interchangeable core throughout. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources,

not available from after-market keyblank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK

charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner’s representative Albert Dee to

determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure, stamping, degree of physical

security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the

system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual

requirements from the Owner. Contractor will install permanent cylinders/cores.

1. Existing factory-registered master key system.

2. Primus Level 3G

3. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores in E keyway. Remove

at substantial completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in Owner’s

presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates.

4. Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property.

5. Furnish 10 construction keys.





6. Furnish 2 construction control keys.

7. Key Cylinders: furnish 6-pin solid brass construction.

B. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are

maintained. Locksets and cylinders same manufacturer.

C. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner.

1. For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand-

master keys, 3 control keys.

2. For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.

D. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner at

completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:

A. Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware schedule and

printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from

manufacturers’ furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’

representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make

corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of

wall/frame condition.

A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and

security codes.

1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material.

1. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished

floor, per California Building Code, Section 1008.1.9.2 and 11B-404.2.7.

2. Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.

3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to

remain, match locations of existing hardware.

B. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items,

fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level,

plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper

installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by

Architect.





1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes,

etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms

of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to

tops of sweeps.

2. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request

for Substitution with Architect.

3. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.

B. Locate floor stops no more than 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See

paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal.

Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where

situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction.

C. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable

degree of swing.

D. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

3.4. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be

adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.

1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or

replace to Owner’s satisfaction.

2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.

a) Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom – do not force.

Turn valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process

from that point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns

counterclockwise.

3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully-opened

position in no more than 10 seconds.

B. Inspection of fire door assemblies and means-of-egress panic-hardware doors: Per 2016

NFPA-80 5.2.1: hire an independent third-party inspection service to prepare a report

listing these doors and include a statement that there are zero deficiencies with the fire-

rated assemblies and the openings with panic hardware.

C. Fire-rated doors:

1. Wood doors: adjust to 0.125 inches clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.

2. Steel doors: adjust to 0.063 inches minimum to 0.188 inches maximum clearance

at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.

3. Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance (undercut) above

threshold or finish floor material under door.

D. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has

visited the Project and has accomplished the following:

1. Has re-adjusted hardware.

2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and

instructed Owner’s personnel.

3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed.

4. Has submitted written report identifying problems.





3.5 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware, including adjustment and maintenance procedures.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING:

A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows,

etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation

process.

3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.

B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by

Architect’s door hardware consultant.

SPEXTRA: 451986-2

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE

LOCK

ND50TD RHO 626 SCH

1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 EV D 626 SCH

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE

1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE

1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER

1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 571 626 IVE




1 EA PRIVACY INDICATOR

LOCK

L9456T 06N L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH

1 EA FSIC CORE 30-120 626 SCH

1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP ST-1630 689 LCN

1 EA TOP JAMB MTG PLATE 4040XP-18TJ 689 LCN


1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE










1 EA PRIVACY INDICATOR

LOCK

L9456T 06N L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH

1 EA FSIC CORE 30-120 626 SCH

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN


1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE






1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH



1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE



Provide each FLD door(s) with the following:

1 SET 2-DOOR BIFOLD

ASSEMB

C-415 KNC

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4 652 IVE

2 EA DOOR PULL, 3/4" RND 8102HD 6" STD 630 IVE







3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE

1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE PA-AX-XP98-L-F-2SI-06 626 VON


1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SCH

1 EA PRIMUS RIM CYLINDER 20-710 EV D 626 SCH

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP DEL EDA 689 LCN


1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18L/FS18S AS REQ'D BLK IVE


1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 547A-223 A ZER



3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE

1 EA CORRIDOR

W/DEADBOLT

LV9456T 06N L583-363 630 SCH


1 EA LOCK GUARD LG12 630 IVE

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN


1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18L/FS18S AS REQ'D BLK IVE

1 EA GASKETING 429AA-S AA ZER

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 547A-223 A ZER

END OF SECTION




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Glass.

B. Glazing compounds and accessories.


A. Section 08 51 13, Aluminum Windows

B. Energy calculations or prescriptive compliance documents.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association

B. ANSI American National Standards Institute

C. ASTM Formerly the American Society for Testing and Materials

D. CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission

E. FT Fully Tempered

F. GANA Glass Association of North America

G. HS Heat-strengthened

H. ICC International Code Council

I. IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council

J. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance

K. LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratories

L. LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design

M. Low-E Low emissivity




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

N. LSG Light to Solar Gain

O. NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council

P. SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

Q. SC Shading Coefficient

R. USGBC The U.S. Green Building Council

S. VLT Visible Light Transmittance

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developing from normal use that are attributed to the

manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining

and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling,

cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed

to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for

maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.

Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture or film on interior surfaces of

glass.

C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the

manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining

and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge

separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those

allowed by referenced laminated glass standards.

D. Interspace or Airspace: The space between lites of any insulating glass unit that contains

dehydrated air or a specified gas.

E. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass products as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

F. Performance Requirements

1. Energy Characteristics: Certified U-Factor and SHGC of completed glazed assemblies

shall conform to those required in the energy calculations or prescriptive energy

compliance documents included in the Contract Documents.


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this

section; require attendance by all affected installers.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.

B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units.

D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test

reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility

and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.

E. Manufacturer Reports: Submit Glass Fabricator's Shop Drawing Review indicating compliance

with glazing standards established by the Glass Association of North America (GANA).

Submittal to include thermal stress and structural load analysis of the proposed glass types,

configuration and sizes.

F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information



a. Float glass manufacturing feedstock materials are scrutinized as part of a quality

process given the sensitive nature of glass production. It is common for

manufacturers to produce scrap glass, called cullet, which is stockpiled and then

reprocessed and reutilized into the manufacturing process. The range of cullet

typically comprises between 10%- 20% of the final manufactured glass product, this

should be verified with the manufacturer. Because cullet is generated at the

manufacturing site, the chemical make-up of the cullet is known, and it can be sorted

and stockpiled appropriately prior to reutilization as feedstock. If cullet is being

claimed toward recycled content, it should be determined that the cullet is being fed

from the end of a production line (as waste in the production process) back into the

beginning of the same line. This should be noted in the special environmental

requirements product form.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for

glazing installation methods.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five years documented experience.

C. Safety glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and

ANSI 297.1.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification

label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with ASTM C 1048 and CBC 2406.2.

D. Insulating glass certification program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing

agencies:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.

2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.

E. Mock-ups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated in section 2.5 Product

Schedule to verify selections and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and

execution.

1. Construction: Build mockups with glass and glazing systems specified for the project,

including typical lite size, framing systems and glazing methods.

2. Scheduling: Notify architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will

be available for viewing.

3. Quality Assurance: Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as

a standard for judging the completed work. Accepted mockups may become part of the

completed work if undisturbed at the time of substantial completion.

1.8 FIELD CONDTIONS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure,

interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.

C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including

replacement of failed units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Non-Fire-Rated Glass Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either

the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. PPG Glass




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

2. Guardian.

3. Pilkington.

4. Visteon.

5. Or equal.

B. Non-Fire-Rated Glazing Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the

named fabricator or an equal fabricator by one of the other fabricators specified.

1. Oldcastle Glass.

2. Viracon.

3. Guardian.

4. Or equal.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass (Safety Glass): ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-

Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.

1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass at interior pane of insulated glass unit for all

exterior storefronts, doors and aluminum windows and in place of annealed float glass

where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass

lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance

Requirements" Article.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).

C. Laminated Glass: 3/8” thickness. Place in interior hollow metal windows, ASTM C 1172, and

complying with other requirements specified and with the following:

1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency

to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites

and installation.

a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's

standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.

2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances

and air or glass pockets.

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Safety Glazing.

1. Application: Vision lites in fire-resistance-rated doors, sidelights and fire rated windows

2. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing

according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.

3. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch nominal thickness; faced

on one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR

1201 for Category II materials. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of

the following:




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); Standard

FireLite NT

b. Safti First; SuperLite

c. Or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements for

Substitutions.

E. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E 774, Class A.

1. Nominal Thickness: 1 inch

2. Glass - Vision Units: Two lites, one fire-rated and one -way mirror glass as scheduled:

a. Exterior Lite: One way transparent mirror clear glass

b. Interior Lite: Clear FireLite NT with premium surface finish, FireLite Plus® with

Premium finish.

3. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites

at unit's edge.

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, 10 year limited warranty.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel.

a. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard desiccant.

B. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

2.3 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads

acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with California

Building code.

1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.

2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery

of glazing materials.

3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure

vapor retarder and air barrier:

1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.

2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier

and vapor retarder seal.

3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

2.4 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.

3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Glazing Putty (Type GP-1): Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor

use, knife grade consistency; grey color.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

C. Silicone Sealant (Type SJ-3): Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion

without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class

25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color to match window frame color.

2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length

of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space

minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum

3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive

on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15

Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size; black color.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.

b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.

c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM

C864 Option I; color to match window frame color.

E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.

D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8

3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE

GLAZING)

A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing

junctions with butyl sealant.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full

contact.

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous

contact.

E. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.4 INSTALLATION – EXTERIOR WET & DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND

SEALANT)

A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners

by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.

B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full

perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient

pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.

E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch

below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.

F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with SJ-3 type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing,

but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line.

G. Apply cap bead of SJ-3 type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line.

flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.5 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit.

B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24

inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.

C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with SJ-3 type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not

more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and

vapor seal.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9

D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their

products.

B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels after Work is complete.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark

heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

3.9 SCHEDULE

A. See Drawings for locations of glass types.

END OF SECTION




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 1

SECTION 09 05 61

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following

types of floor coverings:

1. Ceramic Tile.

2. Carpet Tile

B. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.

C. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or pH conditions.

1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such

remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under

Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into

the contract, a contract modification will be issued.


A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed

for at least 24 hours prior to testing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination

of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:

1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods.

2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.

B. Testing Agency's Report: Include:

1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.

2. Summary of conditions encountered.

3. Moisture and pH test reports.

4. Copies of specified test methods.

5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.

6. Submit report to Architect.

7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.

C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.






A. Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid

by Contractor.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing

specified.

1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with

project Owner's project contact information.

C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:

1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.

2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.

3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.

4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.

5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing

will start.


A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at

least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.

B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least

48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for

conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any

recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following

characteristics:

1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor,

floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at

edges.

2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited.

3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with

ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.

B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for

the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from

flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for

substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.

C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended

by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring





manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of

flooring without further treatment.

1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum.

2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION

A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:

1. Preliminary cleaning.

2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each

additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring

manufacturer.

3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless


4. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Specified remediation, if required.

6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.

7. Other preparation specified.

8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.

9. Protection.

B. Remediations:

1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this

condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.

2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the

level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that

adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire

suspect floor area.

3. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no

additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present

is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation

of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire

suspect floor area.

3.2 PRELIMINARY CLEANING

A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive

removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance,

mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.

B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.





3.3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING

A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test

method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.

B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements

of this section.

C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.

D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,

as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.

E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as

indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3

pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.

F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.

3.4 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING



B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements

of this section.

C. Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows.

D. Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified

ASTM test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do

not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.


indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds

75 percent relative humidity.

F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.

3.5 pH TESTING



B. Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the

Contractor's convenience.

C. Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.





D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1

inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper

into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.


indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over 10.

3.6 PREPARATION

A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.

B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.

C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints,

and other irregularities with patching compound.

D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.

3.7 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING

A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.

3.8 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING

A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.

END OF SECTION




GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 1

SECTION 09 21 16

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall non-load bearing framing.

C. Metal channel ceiling framing.

D. Fire rated area separation walls.

E. Acoustic insulation.

F. Cementitious backing board.

G. Gypsum wallboard.

H. Joint treatment and accessories.


A. See section 01 81 22 Acoustical Performance Requirements

B. See section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

C. See section 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Acoustic Attenuation for Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: STC of 45-49 calculated in

accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.

B. Shaft Wall: Configure and install components as required to achieve the following:

1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span

deflection of U360.

2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.





1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.

C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.

E. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754,

provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and

deflections.






A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated

assemblies.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and

finishing, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to Listed Assemblies by UL cited in the partition schedule.

B. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following

characteristics:

1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.





C. Fire Rated Assemblies:

1. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the

particular assembly.

2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular

assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.

2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.

3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.

4. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.


B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and

properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum

deflection of wall framing of L/360 at 7.5 psf.

1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.

2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.

3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.

4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties

necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.

1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:

a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.

D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.

E. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as

indicated on drawings.

2.3 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.

3. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com.

4. National Gypsum Company:, www.nationalgypsum.com.

5. PABCO Gypsum: www.pabcogypsum.com.

6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.


B. Impact-Rated Wallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft-body and hard-body impact in accordance with

ASTM C1629.

1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.





2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM 03273.

3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M.

4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM

C1278/C1278M.

5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.

6. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

7. Edges: Tapered.

8. Products:

a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard.

b. Temple-Inland Inc; ComfortGuard AR Abuse Resistant.

c. USG Corporation; Fiberock Brand Panels--VHI Abuse-Resistant.

d. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:

1. Application: Surfaces adjacent to tile in wet areas including exterior soffits and vertical

walls in toilet rooms not receiving tile.

2. Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to

minimum joints in place; ends square cut.

3. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with

ASTM C1288.

a. Application: substrate for tile applications in wet area's.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

c. Products:

1) James Hardie Building Products, Inc; Hardibacker Cement Board.

2) USG; Wonder Board.

4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

5. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.

6. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch.

7. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch.

8. Edges: Tapered.

9. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board ("Green

board").

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Board ("Green board").

c. Lafarge North America Inc; Watercheck ("Greenboard").

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.

e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Water Curb ("Green board").

f. Temple-Inland Inc; Water-Resistant Gypsum Board ("Green board").

g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.

h. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Regular Type:

a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

c. Edges: Tapered.

2. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated.

a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested

assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.

b. Edges: Tapered.





E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends

square cut.

1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C

1396/C 1396M; water-resistant faces.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation:

1. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 518; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following:

a. Flame Spread Index: 5 (class I/A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

b. Smoke Developed Index: 35 (class I/A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84.

c. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.

d. Combustibility:

e. Thickness: 3-1/2 inches.

f. Facing: Unfaced.

g. Manufacturers:

1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

2) Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.

3) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

h. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Joint Sealers: As specified in Section 07 92 05.

C. Sheet caulking for junction boxes: "Lowery's Electrical Box Sealer" (800-772-2521 ), or Tremco

sheet caulking (800-321-7906). Sheet caulking for junction boxes at fire-rated assemblies:

"Firestop Putty Pads" by Hevi-duty/Nelson (800-331-7325), Specified Technologies, Inc. (800-

992-1180), or HILTI CP-617 (800-879-8000).

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project

conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.

2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed

to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members,

and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1 002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior

locations.

G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;

steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.

H. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.

I. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit

application; to rigidly secure materials in place.





J. Expanding Foam Sealant: Class 1 fire retardant polycell expanding foam by Macklanburg Duncan

(800-348-3571).

K. Cementitious sealant: Spray-applied (40 pct) Monokote Z-146.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.2 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated, if not indicated

on drawings, then space at 16 inches O. C.

C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard, in no case shall spacing of studs exceed 16 inches

O. C.

1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.

2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain

clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with

continuous bridging.

4. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Follow details on drawings, assure free movement of

top of stud connections for deflection.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less

than double studs at jambs.

E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board,

not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate

channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

1. Orientation: Horizontal.

F. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600

requirements.

G. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel channel blocking for support of:

1. Framed openings.

2. Wall mounted cabinets.

3. Plumbing fixtures.

4. Toilet partitions.

5. Toilet accessories.

6. Wall mounted door hardware.





H. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories,

and hardware. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.

3.3 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,

especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges

occurring over firm bearing.

C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring

members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsum board

at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular to framing

or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of

assembly listing.

E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer

of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination if

permitted under testing agency testing.

F. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior

gypsum soffit board with sealant.

3.4 PENETRATION (through Sound-Rated Construction).

A. Cut-outs are to be regular and not fracture core or tear covering of gypsum board and meet the

following requirements.

B. Minimize penetrations of insulated wall and ceiling constructions. Penetrate only where necessary

and fully seal airtight at the perimeter using acoustical sealant.

C. Where ducts and piping greater than 3-inches diameter penetrate insulated wall or ceiling

construction, provide a clearance of 1-inch to 1/4-inch at the perimeter of the penetration.

D. Where conduit piping 3-inches diameter and less (including mechanical, hydraulic, plumbing,

etc.) pass through insulated wall or ceiling construction, provide a clearance of 114-inch I 1/8-

inch between the conduit or piping and the structure, unless otherwise shown.

E. After the ductwork, conduit or piping has been installed, repair the gypsum board perimeter

clearance to the specified tolerance as required. Where the clearance exceeds 314-inch, provide a

sheet metal sleeve within the partition packed with safing insulation batts and caulk both sides

airtight with an acoustical sealant. Where the perimeter clearance exceeds 3/8-inch, use a flexible

backing rod to caulk against.

F. Where penetration clearances are 3/8-inch or less, caulk airtight with acoustical sealant at gypsum

board.





G. All gypsum board penetrations (including those resulting from wiring, cables, and electrical

junction boxes) are to be sealed airtight with acoustical sealant.

H. The back and sides of junction boxes in sound-rated construction must be sealed airtight with

sheet caulking. Caulk perimeter face at gypsum board with acoustical sealant.

I. Recessed panel boards, equipment, boxes, etc. with penetration area greater than 25 sq. in. at

sound-rated partitions are to be fully enclosed and sealed with 5/8-inch thick gypsum board or 2

psf sheet lead.

J. Seal multiple conduit penetrations airtight with expanding fire foam sealant.

K. Seal other sound-rated conditions with spray-applied (40 pct) cementitious sealant equal to

Monokote Z 146.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

3.6 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint

compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.

C. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and

as scheduled below.

1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1.

2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2.

3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4.

4. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Semi-Gloss or Gloss Paint Finish: Level 5.

D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive

finishes.

1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

E. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after

joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.





3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction.

3.8 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE AS INDICATED ON FINISH PLANS

A. Levels of finish are as defined by GA-214.

B. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.

C. Level 2: Areas behind fixed cabinetry.

D. Level 3: Utility spaces including electrical rooms and mechanical rooms.

E. Level 4:

1. Individual offices

2. Public Areas

3. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish.

F. Level 5:

1. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.

END OF SECTION




SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 1

SECTION 09 22 00

SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing for:

a. Interior non-load-bearing walls and ceilings.

b. Interior furred walls.

2. Bridging, bracing, clips, accessories, fasteners and other materials.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel

2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing

3. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI

Tensile Strength.

2. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire.

3. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.

4. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.

5. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

6. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel

Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum

Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.


A. Coordination: Coordinate details and requirements of other work that adjoins or fastens to metal

studs or furring and requires backing or special support framing included in this Section.

1. Coordinate installation of metal frames, anchors, blocking, electrical work, and mechanical

work which is to be placed by others in or behind partition framing. Allow such items to be

installed after framing is complete.

2. Items requiring backing or support include, but are not necessarily limited to, casework,

wall-mounted finish hardware, miscellaneous specialties, handrail brackets, and similar

items.





3. Obtain Owner’s Representative approval of backing method proposed to satisfy

requirements that differ from methods indicated or shown.

B. Preinstallation conference:

1. Contractor shall arrange meeting to be attended by Owner’s Representative, Contractor and

Contractor’s installer, and agents of manufacturers, all of whom shall have had at least one

week’s advance notice.

2. Convene meeting minimum 7 days prior to commencing work of this Section.

3. Meeting shall be held at the job site.

4. Requirements of related work, preparation, storage and handling, materials, specification

requirements, coordination with related or adjoining work, work sequence, items requiring

backing and support, and issues that might affect proper metal support assemblies shall be

discussed.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: List of materials and manufacturer's product information showing compliance

with specified requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Location of framing assemblies in project.

2. Sizes and spacing of framing components.

3. Methods of fastening framing members to each other and to adjacent materials and

structure.

4. Details of vertical movement devices and connection to framing and structure.

5. Bearing and anchor points and anchor details.

6. Accessory products required for complete installation.

7. Prefabricated assemblies and special details.

8. Alternative elements or components and substitutions requested by.

D. Certificates: Submit mill certificates verifying that products furnished comply with specified

requirements, including:

1. Bare metal thickness, measured to 1/1000 inch.

2. Yield strength of steel.

3. Tensile strength of steel.

4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gage length.

5. Chemical analysis of steel.

6. Coating thickness, measured by mass or thickness.


A. Installer Qualifications: Adequate number of skilled craftsmen thoroughly trained and

experienced in the necessary crafts and who are familiar with the specified requirements and

methods needed for proper performance of the work.

B. Code Requirements: Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of agencies having

jurisdiction.





1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in their original unopened packages protected from damage. Do

not store material directly on grade. Provide support so that material is not in direct contact

with ground.

B. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installing.

C. Provide adequate storage area to protect materials from damage by other installers.

D. Provide adequate support to prevent bowing of framing members prior to installation.

E. Store framing members at slight angle to allow drainage of moisture.

F. Inspect material before installing to determine its suitability for the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO),

2. Clark Western Building Systems,

3. Dietrich Industries, Inc.,

4. Or, approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Studs - Manufactured from Prime Mill Certified Steel; re-rolled steel without mill

certificates is not acceptable.

1. Non-Load-Bearing Members: Comply with ASTM C645.

2. Provide galvanized framing members.

3. Galvanized Members: Manufactured from ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet.

a. Galvanizing Coating: G60.

4. Nominal 20 Gage Members: Color code white.

a. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch.

b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.0329 inch.

c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 33.

5. Nominal 18 Gage Members: Color code yellow.




6. Nominal 16 Gage Members: Color code green.




7. Nominal 14 Gage Members: Color code orange.








8. Nominal 12 Gage Members: Color code red.




B. Runner Track: Comply with gauges, configurations, sizes, and physical properties indicated on

Drawings. Material to meet requirements of A653/A653M and with G-60 galvanized coating.

C. Deflection Tracks / Compensation Channels / Slotted Tracks:

1. System 1 (Slip Track):

a. Description: Deep leg track, formed from 16 gauge steel with minimum 2-1/2 inch

flanges with 1-1/2 slots at 1 inch on center and meeting requirements of ASTM

A653/A653M, Grade 50 with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi and with G-60

galvanized coating.

b. Product: Sliptrack Systems, Inc.’s “Slp-Trk”; or equal.

2. System 2 (Fire Trak):

a. Description: 16 gauge steel minimum. Ceiling runner track designed to allow heads-

of-walls to compress or extend with movement of structure above while maintaining

fire rating of wall assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C645, of thickness

indicated for studs and of width to accommodate depth of studs indicated with flanges

offset to accommodate gypsum board thickness.

b. Product: Fire Trak Corp.’s “Fire Trak Shadowline and Cavity Shadowline”; or equal.

D. Channels:

1. Typical for Framing, Furring, and Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel coated with rust-

inhibitive material.

2. Main Carrying Channels at Gypsum Wallboard Suspended Ceiling Only: 1-1/2 inch hot-

rolled steel carrying channels coated with rust-inhibitive material or galvanized and

weighing 1.12 pounds per lineal foot.

3. Furring (Hat) Channels, Screw-on Type: 7/8 inch formed from 20 gauge galvanized steel

with either plain or perforated flanges to receive screws.

E. Adjustable Wall Furring Bracket: 20 gauge galvanized steel with serrated edges.

F. Partition Bridging: Cold-rolled channel or stud manufacturer’s standard bridging for partition

stud.

G. Backing Plates: 1/4 inch, 12 gauge, 16 gauge, 18 gauge, and 25 gauge unpunched steel studs,

flat steel plates, and bent plates, profiles as shown. Steel to meet requirements of ASTM

A653/A653M and with G-60 galvanized coating

H. Fasteners:

1. Sheet Metal Screws: Self-drilling and self-tapping, flat pan head screws, No. 8 unless

otherwise noted. ITW Buildex’s “Hi-Lo and S-12 Fasteners”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s

“Rawl Self-Drilling Screws”; United States Gypsum Co.’s “USG Screws, Type S-12 Pan

Head”; or equal.

2. Concrete Screws:





a. Description: Heat-treated screws with unique Hi-Lo thread design that cuts threads in

pre-drilled holes in concrete.

b. Product: ITW Buildex’s “Tapcon Anchors”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s “Tapcon

Fasteners”; United States Gypsum Co.’s “HWH Tapcon Anchors”; or equal.

3. Powder Driven Fasteners: Meet requirements noted on drawings.

4. Pin and Clip Anchors for Vertical Hanger Wires at Gypsum Board Ceiling Only: Hilti

Inc.’s “No. CC27DN27P8T Suspended Ceiling Clip”; ITW Red Head’s “L651 Ceiling Clip

and L684, 1-1/2 Inch Drive Pin”; or equal.

5. Expansion Anchors: Meet requirements noted on drawings.

6. Expansion Eye Anchors: ITW Red Head’s “Dynabolt, Tie Wire TW-1614”; or equal.

7. Machine Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Low carbon steel standard fasteners, externally and

internally threaded, ASTM A307; malleable washers.

8. Screw Eye Bolt:

a. Description: Seamless eye, galvanized, 1/4 inch diameter by 3-3/4 inches overall

length.

b. Product: Gardiner Mfg. Co.’s “No. 511 Screw Eye Bolts with Shoulder”; or equal.

I. Hanger, Bracing, and Tie Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1, soft temper. Minimum gauges:

Hangers, 8; Diagonal bracing wire, 12; Single-strand tie wire, 16; Double-strand tie wire, 18.

J. Welding Rods: Complying with AWS D1.3, and as indicated on the drawings.

1. Touch up welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich paint.

2. Do not weld steel less than 0.0428 inch in thickness.

K. Grout: Good grade of commercial non-shrink cement grout; apply to bearing surfaces to

ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry

construction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive metal support systems and verify that:

1. Supporting substrates and abutting framing are in compliance with requirements,

including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of framing

members.

2. Bearing surfaces and supporting structures are ready to receive the work.

3. Work by other trades is complete and accurate to the point where installation of the

framing can begin.

4. Field measurements are as indicated in the drawings. Notify in writing of any deviation

between the drawings and actual conditions prior to starting work.

5. Conditions are ready to receive work.

6. Rough-in utilities are in proper location.

7. Layout of hanger wires will not interfere with other work.

B. Immediately notify of any discrepancies in the work, on Drawings or in the specification that

will interfere with the work.

C. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work.





D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 ERECTION - GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and reviewed shop drawings.

B. Install framing to support the design loads and to accommodate movement of the primary

building structure and clearances of intended openings.

C. Framing may be shop or field fabricated; fabricate prefabricated assemblies square, with

framing members attached in manner to prevent racking and minimize distortion while lifting

and transporting.

D. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely

fastened, in accordance with the Contract Documents, reviewed shop drawings, and ASTM

C754.

E. Do not splice framing members, except track and studs in non-axial-load bearing walls.

F. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

1. Exception: plasma cutting shall be permitted.

2. Cut framing members square for attachment to perpendicular members.

G. Fasten framing members by welding or screws. Wire tying of framing members is not

permitted.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting weld work.

1. Do not weld steel less than 0.0428 inch in thickness.

2. Touch up welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich paint.

I. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to the Contract Documents, reviewed shop

drawings, building code requirements, or manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is more

stringent.

1. Screws: Penetrate joined members by not less than three screw threads.

2. Bolted Connections: Drill holes maximum of 1/16 inch larger than specified bolt size;

torch cutting of holes is not permitted.

J. Anchors to Concrete: Installed after full compressive strength of concrete has been achieved.

K. Install insulation in spaces inside built-up exterior framing members that will be inaccessible

upon completion of framing work, including headers, sills, boxed joists, and double studs.

L. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized;

determination of all bracing requirements, location of bracing, design and installation, is

responsibility of Contractor.

M. Do not bridge building expansion joints and control joints with framing members; frame both

sides of joints independently.





N. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, hold-down angles, stud girts, anchors and fasteners to

provide complete and proper framing system.

O. Installation Tolerances:

1. Variation from Plumb, Level, and True to Line: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.

2. Variation from Plan Location of Individual Framing Members: Plus/minus 1/8 inch, with

cumulative error not more than minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other

finish materials.

3.03 STUD WALLS - GENERAL

A. Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.

B. Install continuous top and bottom track of size to accommodate studs.

C. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends and at spacing required by the

design, but not greater than the following:

1. Using Power Driven Fasteners: At 24 inches on center.

2. Using Cast-In-Place or Expansion Anchors: At 32 inches on center.

D. Splice abutting lengths of track or butt weld or securely attach each length to supporting

structure as indicated.

E. Install studs with open side facing in same direction, plumb, and aligned in accordance with

ASTM C754.

F. Wall Openings Larger Than Stud Spacing: Frame with headers and supporting studs as

indicated on Drawings.

1. Install headers so that they lie entirely within the width of the wall.

2. Install king studs, jack studs and cripple studs below window sills, above window and

door heads, and elsewhere as necessary to support openings, securely attached to adjacent

supporting members.

3. Design studs above openings to support all imposed loads.

4. Do not use wall track to support any loads unless specifically designed for that purpose.

G. Wall Openings Not More Than Stud Spacing in Width: Frame top and bottom with stud

headers.

3.04 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Install studs securely attached to flanges of top and bottom tracks at corners, openings and

partition intersections.

B. Structural Movement Isolation: Isolate wall framing from building structure to prevent

transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support, using one of the following methods

attached to continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to the building structure:

1. System 1 (Slip Track).

2. System 2 (Fire Trak).





3.05 SUSPENDED CEILING

A. Secure suspended ceiling to structural framing using hangers, 1-1/2 inch hot rolled carrying

channels, and furring channels.

B. Interference:

1. Where wide air conditioning ducts or similar obstructions above gypsum board ceiling

interfere with suspension hanger wires, provide independent framing below obstruction to

support the ceiling as an obligation under this section.

2. Support framing from floor structure above. Do not attach framing to ductwork.

C. Do not use Drop-In type expansion anchors for installing suspended ceiling.

D. Hanger Wires:

1. Space hanger wires maximum 4 feet on center along carrying channels spaced maximum 4

feet on center.

2. Plumb hanger wires. Add counterbrace wires when hanger wires are more than 1 in 6 out

of plumb.

3. Fasten hanger wires with not less than three tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches for

vertical wires and four tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches for diagonal wires.

Install hanger or diagonal wire anchors to the structure in such a manner that the direction

of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire.

4. Provide hanger wires to clear furred-area interferences with suspension system. Do not

penetrate ductwork with hanger wires.

5. Separate all ceiling hanging and diagonal wires at least 6 inches from all unbraced ducts,

pipes, conduit, and similar items. It is acceptable to attach lightweight items, such as single

electrical conduit not exceeding 3/4 inch nominal diameter, to hanger wires using

connectors acceptable to [University’s Representative][University’s Representative and the

Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development].

6. At control and expansion joints, provide extra hangers as required to support discontinuous

runners.

7. Splices will not be permitted in any hanger wires unless specially accepted by to

[University’s Representative t][University’s Representative and the Office of Statewide

Health Planning and Development].

E. Carrying Channels:

1. For Gypsum Board Application: Space carrying channels at maximum 4 feet on center and

not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls.

2. For Metal Lath and Plaster Application: Space carrying channels at maximum 3 feet on

center and not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls.

3. Where carrying channels are spliced, lap splices minimum 12 inches with flanges of

channels interlocked and securely tied near each end of splice with wire looped twice

around channel.

F. Gypsum Board Furring Channels:

1. Place perpendicular to carrying at 16 inches on center, not more than 2 inches from

perimeter walls.

2. Lap splices minimum 8 inches.

G. Provide additional metal framing to clear interfering elements in furred area.





H. Completely frame openings with channels. Reinforce openings in suspension systems that

interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend

bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of opening.

I. Entire suspension system, including all intersections, splices, and perimeter joints, shall be

capable of meeting seismic requirements of applicable code requirements.

3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work under provisions of Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Work.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

C. Replace all damaged products.

END OF SECTION




PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 1

SECTION 09 24 00

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior three-coat Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath system.

2. Integral colored finish coat and field painted finish.


1. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulations included in Portland

cement plaster assemblies.

2. Section 07 27 00 “Air Barriers” for flashing windows, door, and other openings.

3. Section 07 92 05 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior Portland cement

plaster (stucco).

4. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for field painting of plaster.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Showing details of construction for framing, reinforcement, and trims; including

locations where each type material, mix, coating thickness, material sizes and

thicknesses, and fastenings will be used.

2. Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,

elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and

configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and

connections to other work.

4. Show locations and extent of weather-barrier (building paper and flashing sheet). Include

details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and

outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

a. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of weather barrier.

b. Include details of mockups.

C. Coordination Drawings:





1. Comprehensive, completely integrated set of plans, sections, elevations, and details,

drawn to scale, of separate trades work, indicating interface support/connections, and

relationships between materials, and products, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, based on input from fabricators and installers of the

items involved:

a. Framing, including backing, blocking, strapping, and similar accessory/sub-

framing materials.

b. Sheathing, including building paper.

c. Portland cement plaster, including trim and self-adhering flashing sheet.

d. Other materials and products that occur in, on, adjacent to, or contiguous with

above work.

2. At a minimum, indicate the following

a. Locations/spacing of trim moldings.

b. Locations/dimensions of self-adhering flashing sheet (underlying trim moldings).

c. Locations/spacing of connections/fastenings of:

1) Sheathing

2) Trim moldings

d. Sequence of installation of:

1) Building paper.

2) Flexible flashing.

3) Trim moldings.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated with

texture and color.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 12 by 12

inches, and prepared on rigid backing with color selected.



1. 2013 Building Standards Administrative Code, Part 1, CBSC.

2. 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, CBSC (2012 IBC & California

Amendments).

3. 2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, CBSC (2011 National Electrical Code &


4. 2013 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, CBSC (2012 Uniform Mechanical

Code & California Amendments).

5. 2013 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, CBSC (2012 Uniform Plumbing Code &


6. 2013 California Energy Code, Part 6, CBSC.

7. 2013 California Historical Building Code, Part 8, CBSC.

8. 2013 California Fire Code, Part 9, CBSC (2012 International Fire Code & California

Amendments).

9. 2013California referenced Standards, Part 12 CBSC.

10. Title 8 C.C.R. Chapter 4, Sub-Ch. 6 – Elevator Safety Orders.

11. Title 19 C.C.R., Public Safety, SFM Regulations.






B. Comply with requirements of 2013 CBC Chapter 25.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For Portland cement plaster assemblies with fire-resistance

ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated

according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to DSA.

D. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Comprehensive, completely integrated mockups of separate trades work, indicating

interface connections, transitions, relationships between materials and finishes, and

quality of workmanship. Coordinated mockups shall include, but is not limited to, the

following:

a. Work of this Section.

b. Framing, including backing, blocking, strapping, and similar accessory/sub-

framing materials.

c. Sheathing, including building paper.

d. Sealants.

e. Penetrations of Portland cement plaster assemblies.

f. Other materials and finishes that are within indicated area of coordinated mockups,

including barrier/backing/support for above work.

2. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

4. Use of self-furring lath is subject to satisfactory jobsite demonstration for each project of

lath installation, with approval by Inspector of Record.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from

weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Exterior Plasterwork:

1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use

procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings,

and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.

3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has

occurred.

C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for

environmental conditions for applying finishes.





1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of cement plaster system that fail in materials within specified warranty

period. Failure includes, but is not limited to, blistering, peeling, flaking, delaminating, rusting,

checking, crazing, fading beyond manufacturer's published limits, or chipping as a result of

manufacturing defects.

1. Warranty Period: 3 years.

B. Special Waterproof Warranty: Submit cement plaster system manufacturer's warranty

certifying that work of this Section has been properly applied in strict accordance with system

manufacturer's recommended procedures, instructions, and systems current applicable

specifications; has been properly integrated into building construction in accordance with sound

design and building construction practices; and will remain resistant to water penetration for

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 3 years.

C. Weather Resistive Barriers: 10 years.

D. Installer’s Warranty: 2 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Finish-Coat Plaster: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following manufacturers.

1. ColorTek by Omega. (Basis of Design)

2. LaHabra Stucco.

3. Merlex.

4. Sto.

5. Or equal.

B. Metal Lath: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

manufacturers.

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).

2. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).

3. Dale/Incor.

4. Unimast, Inc.

5. Clark Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.

6. Or equal.

C. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following manufacturers.

1. Jumbo Tex 60 by Fortifiber. (Basis of Design)

2. GM Craft 60 by GMC Roofing.

3. Or equal.





D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Superior Metal Trim. (Basis of Design)

2. Fry Reglet Corp.

3. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).

4. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).

5. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

6. Or equal.

E. Aluminum Trim and Reveals: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the

named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Fry Reglet Corp. (Basis of Design)

2. Gordon, Inc.

3. Pittcon Industries.

4. Or equal.

2.2 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring.

a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.

b. Use: Vertical and horizontal solid support surfaces, such as unit masonry, concrete,

or sheathing. Horizontal open framing up to 16 inches on center.

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Non-self-furring.


b. Use: Attached with fastener when enforcing authority prohibit use of self-furring

types.

3. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath (High Rib):


b. Use: Horizontal open framing 24 inches on center.

2.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER

A. FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper with following:

1. Asphalt saturated paper weighing 56 lbs. per 1,000 square feet, having tensile strength of

89 lbs. and 60-minute water resistance rating.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with

thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Accessories: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,

ASTM A 653 G90 zinc coating.

1. Foundation Weep Screed.

2. Cornerite: Fabricated.

3. External-Corner Reinforcement.





4. Cornerbeads.

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.

b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.

c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening

rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners.

d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at

exterior columns.

5. Casing Beads: Square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

6. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped

configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of

control joint.

7. Expansion Joints: Folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with

expanded flanges.

a. Internal Corners: Double-V, narrow reveal type ("No. 30").

8. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that

is adjustable from 1/4-to-5/8-inch wide; with perforated flanges.

9. Stucco Reglet:

a. Product: “ST” Stucco Reglet by Fry Reglet.

b. Thickness: 24 gage.

10. Surface Mounted Reglet:

a. Product: “SM” Surface Mount Reglet by Fry Reglet.


11. Flashing System:

a. Product: Springlok Flashing System by Fry Reglet.


12. Continuous Soffit Vents: Perforated screeds, with expanded flanges.

a. Product: Model SRS Superior Reveal Screed by Superior Metal Trim.

b. Vent Width: As indicated on Drawings.

13. Termination Screed: J Mold.

a. Product: SJB Superior “J” Bead by Superior Metal Trim.

14. Window /Door Drip: Door Drip Screed.

a. Product: SWD Superior Window Drip by Superior Metal Trim.

15. Drip Screed: Stucco Drip Soffit.

a. Product: SSC Superior Soffit Corner by Superior Metal Trim.

C. Aluminum Trim and Reveals:

1. Aluminum shall be extruded alloy 6063 T5, with clear anodized finish.

2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of

damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.

C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063 and CBC

Section 2506.

1. Nails, screws, and staples as specified in CBC.





2. Fastener for use with concrete/masonry for attaching lath and screeds/control joints,

weeps and other shapes.

3. Masonry Applications: Galvanized steel fasteners of furring type and length suitable for

at least 1/2 inch penetration of the brick or block substrate.

4. Wood Stud Applications: Galvanized steel furring nails and or screws, of type and length

suitable for at least a 5/8 inch penetration of the wood stud system.

D. Sheathing: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”.

E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section “Air Barrier”

for flashing windows, door, and other openings.

F. Thermal Insulation: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”.

G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Comply with requirements of Division 7

Section “Joint Sealants”.

2.6 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Scratch and Brown Coat:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

2. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

3. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

B. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,

and proprietary ingredients.

1. Finish Texture:

a. Exterior: Sand 30/30 finish

2. Colorant: Match color of field finish coating specified in Division 9 Section “Painting”.

2.7 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

B. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with

manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects

caused by plastering.

B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to

bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design

designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

B. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless

blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting

construction with acoustical sealant.

3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH AND WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with requirements of Title 24.

1. Use of self-furring lath is subject to satisfactory jobsite demonstration for each project of

lath installation, with approval by Inspector of Record.

B. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. Lath shall be attached to framing members at spacing of not more than 6 inches o.c., 2

inches maximum from longitudinal edges, in accordance with CBC.

C. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Install 2 layers over sheathing.

3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

C. Weep screed: Install at foundation plate line on all exterior stud walls per CBC.

1. Minimum 4 inches above earth.

2. Minimum 2 inches above paved areas.

D. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect

as follows:

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.





b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft.

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.

3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not

greater than 2-1/2:1.

4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.

5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas

(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension

change.

3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished

plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.

2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with

base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is

indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor.

3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that

act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate

plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove

finish coat at junctures with metal.

4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.

B. Three-Coat System: Total minimum thickness of 7/8 inch for lathing base.

C. Curing Time: Comply with CBC, or longer as needed to insure compliance with manufacturer’s

recommendations for quality stucco installation.

1. Portland cement plaster:

a. Minimum period moist curing:

1) First Coat: 48 hours.

2) Second Coat: 48 hours.

b. Minimum interval between coats:

1) First Coat: 48 hours.

2) Second Coat: 7 days.

D. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases.

E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match texture, finish, and color of Architect

approved sample.

3.7 ASSEMBLY

A. Exterior Side from framing out:

1. Sheathing.

2. Weather-Resistive Barrier.

3. Metal Lath.

4. 3-coat portland cement plaster.





3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore

cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing

and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to

substrate has failed.


A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from

doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and

other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION




TILING 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Tile for floor applications.

B. Tile for wall applications.

C. Trim and Accessories


A. 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of

this section to review installation systems and tile layout. Require attendance by all affected

installers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include

instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions

with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and

setting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size

illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Samples: Provide one full size sample of marble threshold. This will be returned upon acceptance

of sample.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products are compatible with each other and that they

meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal

methods, and polishes and waxes.




TILING 09 30 00 - 2

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Glendale's use in maintenance of

project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Tile: 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than

1 full carton of each type.

I. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information

1. FSC Wood Content


a. For adhesives, sealants, and grouts, documentation including printed statement of

VOC content.




A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118

Series on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 3

years of documented experience.

D. Tile Flooring Surfaces shall be slip resistant per 2016 CBSC 11B-302.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

B. Construct tile mock-Up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified

for the location.

1. Mock-Up shall include two walls and an interior corner, size to be 60 square feet of wall

and 10 square feet of floor, in one corner.

2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.




TILING 09 30 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.

B. Porcelain Floor Tile: 24”x24”, color per finish schedule or selected by architect.

C. Porcelain Wall Tile: 12”x24” with 6”x24” accent tile, color per finish schedule or selected by

architect.

1. Trim Units: Matching bullnose and 6”x12” cove base tile coordinated with field tile.

2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Thresholds: Marble, Carrara (color to be selected), honed finish; profile indicated on Drawings

by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled at 1:2 along two long edges with

radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.

1. Applications: Provide at the following locations:

a. At doorways where tile terminates.

b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.

B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type. 1. Applications: Wall installation.

C. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.

D. Adhesives: Meet LEED Credit EO 4.1.

E. Adhesive Material: Thinset Mortar-exceeds ANSI A 118.4 or as recommended by tile

manufacturer.

F. Organic Adhesive at TCNA W245: ANSI A118.1, thinset bond type.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS AND GROUT

A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.

B. Sand: ASTM C 144.

C. Water: Potable, fresh.

D. Setting bed reinforcing mesh: 2-inch by 2-inch by 16/16, 3-inch by 3-inch by 13/13 or 1-1/2-inch

by 2-inch by 16/13 wire complying with ASTM A 82 or A 185.




TILING 09 30 00 - 4

E. Latex modified dry-set mortar: The following or equal with physical properties equaling or

exceeding those of the products specified.

1. Thin set:

a. MerKrete "705" and "735," Mapei "Ultraflex 1 and 3," or MerKrete "750 RS" or

"Granirapid" as selected by the installer for the conditions of use

b. MerKrete "Integra" or Mapei "Adesilex" for glass tile.

c. MerKrete "200/211" or Mapei "Kerabond/Keralastic" for water features.

2. Medium bed: MerKrete "720 Marble Pro" or Mapei "Franurapid."

3. Mapei makes Adesilex P10 white mortar specifically for glass tile, glass mosaic and marble

mosaic.

F. Portland cement grout: MerKrete "Versatile" or Mapei "Opticolor," or equal with physical

properties equaling or exceeding those of the products specified, sanded or unsanded as applicable

to the joint width and recommended by the grout manufacturer.


A. Backer Board: See Section 09 21 16.

B. Prefabricated shower pan: "Tile Redi" prefabricated pan of the dimensions indicated to be tiled.

C. Sealant and backup for control joints in tiles: Refer to Section 07 92 00.

D. Cleavage membrane: 10-mil thick polyethylene complying with ASTM D 2103, Type 13300.

E. Waterproof membrane: One of the following:

1. "Hydro-Guard SP-1" by MerKrete.

2. "AquaDefense" by MapeL

3. Or equal with physical properties equaling or exceeding those of the membranes specified

above.

F. Reinforcing fabric: Mapei "Reinforcing Fabric."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of

work and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,

are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture

emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended

by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.




TILING 09 30 00 - 5

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness

tolerances.

D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's

instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through

A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook

recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align base and wall joints.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

F. Install thresholds where indicated.

G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.

J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.4 INSTALLATION – FLOORS – MORTAR BET METHODS

A. Over first floor interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North

America Handbook Method F 111 with crack isolation membrane, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Over second floor interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of

North America Handbook Method F121 with waterproof membrane.

C. Crack Isolation Membrane: Lap edges and ends.




TILING 09 30 00 - 6

D. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13.

E. Mortar Bed Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

3.5 INSTALLATION – WALL TILE

A. Over metal studs with a mortar bed, in accordance with The Tile Council of North America

Handbook Method W231, mortar bed with ceramic tile.

1. Provide sheet waterproof membrane (ANSI A118.10).

2. Overlap the wall membrane over the floor membrane to create a watertight assembly.

B. Mortar Bed Thickness: As indicated on drawings but not over 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.6 SEAL GROUT

A. Seal grout no sooner than 30 days after installation.

B. Install per manufacturer's recommendation except seal grout no sooner than 30 days after

installation.

C. Seal floor tiles if recommended by tile manufacturer.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION




RESILIENT FLOORING BASE 09 65 13 - 1

SECTION 09 65 13

RESILIENT FLOORING BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Resilient base.

B. Installation accessories.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.

D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 inch in lenght illustrating color for resilient base

product specified.

E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.

F. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring

manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-strate is acceptable.

G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for the City of Glendale's use in maintenance of

project.


2. Extra Wall Base: 50 linear feet of each type and color.

I. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information









A. Store resilient base as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions

above 55 degrees F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient base installation.

D. Install resilient base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.


A. Resilient Flooring demonstrating a coefficient of friction of at least 0.6 per ASTM C1028 shall

be accepted as meeting the intent of slip resistance. CBC Section 1124B.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and

as follows:

1. Height: 4 inch.

2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.

3. Finish: Satin.

4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.

5. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Roppe; Product as indicated on Color Schedule on drawings.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers that comply with these requirements:

1) Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.

2) Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.

3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.

1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than

required by the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168.

B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.





C. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,

are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

B. Verify that required wall-mounted utilities are in correct location

3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION




CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 1

SECTION 09 68 13

CARPET TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes modular, carpet tile.


1. 09 65 13 "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories

installed with carpet tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical

characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each

type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where

cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.

3. Existing flooring materials to remain.

4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.

5. Type of subfloor.

6. Type of installation.

7. Pattern of installation.

8. Pattern type, location, and direction.

9. Pile direction.

10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.

11. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each

Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated

on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.





E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and

procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program

requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification

indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an

independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Provide glue down or firm cushion installation that complies with CBC section 1124B.3

D. Carpet shall have a level loop, textured loop, level-cut or level-cut/uncut pile texture and

maximum pile height of ½” per CBC section 1124B.3

E. Carpet edges shall comply with CBC section 1124B.2


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and

Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and

dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for

Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to

bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,

install carpet tiles before installing these items.





1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed

and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,

but not less than 10 sq. yd.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carpet Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an

equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Shaw Contract (basis of design)

2. Mohawk

3. Lees

4. Bentley Prince Street

5. Interface

6. Or equal.

2.2 CARPET TILE

A. Product: Shaw Contract Group.

1. Style Name: Per finish schedule or selected by architect

2. Color: Per finish schedule or selected by architect

3. Product Type: Tile

4. Construction: Multi Level Pattern loop

5. Fiber: Eco Solution Q Nylon

6. Protective treatments – SSP Shaw soil protection

7. Primary Backing: Synthetic

8. Secondry Backing: Ecoworx Tile

9. Gauge: 1/12.

10. Density: 6712.

11. Total Thickness: 0.252

12. Stitches per Inch: 11.0.

13. Finished Pile Thickness: .0.118

14. Dye Method: 92% Solution Dyed/8% yarn Died





15. Pattern Repeat: Not Applicable

16. Tufted Weight: 22.0 oz. per. Sq. yd.

17. Size/Width: 24”x24”

18. Installation Method: Glued Down

19. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus 1098.

20. Foot Traffic Recommendation TARR: Severe

21. NSF 140: Gold.

22. Static:less than 3.5 kv

23. Flammability: Passes DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test

24. Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Meets NFPA Class 1 when tested under ASTM E-648 glue

down

25. Smoke Density: NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA-258 - Less than 450 Flaming

ModeWarranties:

a. Lifetime Limited Modular Warranty.

b. Lifetime Stain Warranty.

c. Lifetime Static.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type to suit products and subfloor

conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and as

recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance or provided by carpet tile

manufacturer for the type of carpet being installed.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content

when tested according to ASTM D 5116:

a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.

b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.

c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other

conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and

potential defects.

B. Concrete Substrates:

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with

carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to

receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,

holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more

stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical

methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile

manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture

including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable

flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by

repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking

device.

F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor

Installations."





C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and

fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or

recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION




PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

1. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.

2. Materials for backpriming woodwork.

3. Scope: Finish all interior surfaces and exterior surfaces, where modifications occur,

including the following:

a. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment

before installing equipment.

b. Surfaces inside cabinets.

c. Mechanical and Electrical:

1) In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes,

insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports,

mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

2) In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.

3) On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to

view, including that which is factory-finished.

4) Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating

cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black

paint to visible surfaces.

5) Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard

cabinets to match face panels.

B. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.

2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.

3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.

4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.

5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.

6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.

7. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.

8. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.

9. Ceramic and other tiles.

10. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone.

11. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS).

12. Glass.

13. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.

14. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.

15. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.






1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

B. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of a coat of paint in fully cured state measured in mils

(1/1000-inch).

C. Paint The term, as used in this Section, means all coating system components, including primers,

emulsions, enamels, varnishes, stains, lacquers, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials

whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coat.

D. Sheen: The terms used in these Specifications refer to the following gloss ranges when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 523 test method.

Name

Flat

Low Sheen

Eggshell

Semi-gloss

Gloss

ASTM D 523 Test Method

60-degree meter

60-degree meter

60-degree meter

60-degree meter

60-degree meter

Gloss Range

0 to 7

10 to 15

25 to 30

55 to 60

Gloss Range

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.

C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and

system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, 9 x 12 inch in size.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.


2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.

3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.






A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum 5 years experience.


A. Conform to SCAQMD standards for VOC requirements for products and finishes.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,

coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and

instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90

degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges

required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F

for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,

unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

G. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information by filling out the Special

Environmental Requirements Product Submittal Form located in Appendix A of Section 01 35

43 Special Environmental Requirements.







H. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;

no exceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

All submitted paint products shall be first line, top quality, architectural grade products. Paint

products described as commercial or professional grade will not be considered.

C. Paints:

1. Base Manufacturer: Dunn Edwards Paint Company, www.dunnedwards.com.

2. Vista Paint Company; www.vistapaint.com.

3. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.

4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

D. Transparent Finishes:

1. Base Manufacturer: Deft &McCloskey distributed by Vista Paint.

E. Stains:

1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.


2.2 PAINTING AND COATING - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,

and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under

conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing

and field experience.

3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half

shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a

single production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure

is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer

categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:





a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards

for Architectural Coatings.

b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and

Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:

1) Opaque, Flat: 50 gIL, maximum.

2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 gIL, maximum.

3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 gIL, maximum.

4) Varnishes: 350 gIL, maximum.

a) Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is

located.

b) USGBC LEED Rating System, edition as stated in Section 01 3543;

for interior wall and ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on

interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and finishes, sanding sealers,

other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings.

5) Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a

tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to


D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:

1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-

ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,

diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,

isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene

chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methyl benzene), 1,1, 1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Colors: As denoted in finish schedule

1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without

additional cost to Owner.

2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.

3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the

wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

4. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors

according to the color-coding scheme indicated.

2.3 PAINTING SYSTEMS – EXTERIOR

A. Paint WE-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of latex primer sealer.

2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.

3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

4. Satin: One coat of varnish; McCloskey's 6509 Spar Varnish.

B. Paint GE-OP-3L - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of latex primer sealer.

2. Flat: Two coats of latex; 2000 Duratone 100% Acrylic Flat.





C. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of latex rust-inhibitive primer.2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree

100% Acrylic Gloss 3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400 Carefree 100%

Acrylic Semi-Gloss


3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

D. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:

1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.

2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.

3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

E. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint:

1. Yellow: One coat, with reflective particles; 6900 On-Line Traffic Paint

2. White: One coat, with reflective particles; 7200 Optiline White.

2.4 PAINTING SYSTEMS – INTERIOR

A. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of 100% acrylic block filler.

2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; 8100/6100 Carefree Flat.

B. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:

1. Touch-up with latex corosion resistant primer.

2. Gloss: One coat of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.

3. Semi-gloss: Two coat of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

C. Paint Mal-OP-3L - Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat etching primer.


3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

D. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of acrylic primer sealer.


3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100%.

4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; 1700 Acriglo Velva-Sheen.

5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; 8100/6100 Carefree Flat.

E. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically

indicated or not; commercial quality.

F. Patching Material: Latex filler.

G. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition

that may potentially affect proper application.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.

3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.

4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.

5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.

6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.

D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali

powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate;

rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a

solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime

defects after repair.





I. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex

patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali

surfaces.

J. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit

adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.

K. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

L. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse

floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.

M. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure

water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately

following cleaning.

N. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with

solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

O. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool

cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).

P. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld

splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing

or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,

ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime

after repairs.

Q. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and

rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime

bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

R. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal

knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has

dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

S. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal

knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound

after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

T. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.

B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks

after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.





C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.

F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide.

H. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

I. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.

J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.


A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 1

SECTION 10 14 24

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Interior and Exterior signage of the following types:

1. ADA compliant interior signage, without borders.

2. Fire evacuation, area of rescue assistance and specialty signs.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. California Building Code, current edition.

B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.

C. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG); U.S. Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature.

C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior and exterior

signs.

D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of

available colors.

E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified

including method of attachment.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of California Building Code.




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 2


A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for

installation.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Raised (Tactile) character depth, case, and style: Raised character on sign shall be raised 1/32

inch minimum, uppercase, sans serif style, and shall be duplicated in Braille. (11B-703.2)

B. Braille: Braille shall be contacted (Grade 2). Braille dots shall have a domed or rounded shape

and shall comply with Table 11B-703.31 below. Braille shall be positioned below the

corresponding text in a horizontal format, flush left or center. With multi-lined text, Braille shall

be placed below the entire text. Braille shall be separated 3/8 inch minimum and ½ inch maximum

from any other tactile characters, and 3/8 inch minimum from raised borders and decorative

elements. (11B-703.2)

TABLE 11B-703.3.1 BRAILLE DIMENSIONS

MEASUREMENT RANGE MINIMUM TO MAXIMUM

Dot base diameter 0.059 to 0.063 inch

Distance between two dots in the same cell 1 0.100 inch

Distance between corresponding dots in adjacent cells 1 0.300 inch

Dot height 0.025 to 0.037 inch

Distance between corresponding dots from one cell directly below 1 0.395 to 0.400 inch 1 Measure center to center.

C. Raised character stroke thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 15 percent

maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”. (11B-703.2)

D. Raised character height: Raised character height shall be 5/8 inch minimum and a maximum of 2

inches maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”. (11B-703.2)

E. Raised character and line spacing: Character spacing shall be measured between the two closest

points of adjacent raised character within a message, excluding word spaces. Where characters

have rectangle cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/8 inch

minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum. Where characters have the

other cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/16 inch minimum

and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum at the base of the cross sections, and 1/8

inch minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum at the top of the cross

sections. Characters shall be separated from raised borders and decorative elements 3/8 inch




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 3

minimum. Spacing between the baselines of separate lines of raised characters within a message

shall be 135 percent minimum and 170 percent maximum of the raised character height. (11B-

703.2)

F. Tactile sign installation height and location: Tactile characters on signs shall be located minimum

48 inches above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest

Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the

baseline of the highest line of raised characters. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the

sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where at double doors with one active

leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where at double doors with two active leaves,

the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the

latch side of the single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the

nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a dear floor space

of 18 inches maximum by 18 inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided

beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 decree open position. (11B-

703.4)

G. Raised and visual character proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width

of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the

uppercase “I”. (11B-703.2 and 11B-703.5)

H. Raised and visual character format: Text shall be in a horizontal format. (11B-703.2 and 11B-

703.5)

I. Visual character and line spacing: Visual character spacing on sign shall be measured between

the two closest points of adjacent characters, excluding word spaces. Spacing between individual

characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Spacing

between the baselines of separate lines of characters within a message shall be 135 percent

minimum and 170 percent maximum of the character height. (11B-703.5)

J. Visual character height and installation height: Minimum character height shall comply with

Table 11B-703.5.k below. Viewing distance shall be measured as the horizontal distance between

the character and an obstruction preventing further approach towards the sign. Character height

shall be based on the uppercase letter “I”. Visual characters shall be installed at 40 inches

minimum above the finish floor or ground except for the elevator car controls, floor-level exit

signs and emergency procedures information. (11B-703.5)

HEIGHT TO FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND

FROM BASELINE OF CHARACTER

HORIZONTAL

VIEWING DISTANCE MINIMUM CHARACTER HEIGHT

40 inches to less than

or equal to 70 inches

less than 72 inches 5/8 inch

72 inches and greater 5/8 inch, plus 1/8 inch per foot

of viewing distance above 72 inches

greater than 70 inches to less than

or equal to 120 inches

less than 180 inches 2 inches

180 inches and greater 2 inches, plus 1/8 inch per foot

of viewing distance above 180 inches

greater than 120 inches

less than 21 feet 3 inches

21 feet and greater 3 inches, plus 1/8 inch per foot

of viewing distance above 21 feet




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 4

K. Visual character case and style: Visual characters on sign shall be uppercase or lowercase or a

combination of both and conventional in form. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, script,

highly decorative, or of other unusual forms. (11B-703.5)

L. Visual character stroke thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 10 percent

maximum of the height of the character. (11B-703.5)

M. Visual character pictogram finish and contrast: Visual characters and their background, and

pictograms and their fields sign shall have a non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their

background; and pictograms shall contrast with their field. (11B-703.5 and 11B-703.5)

N. Pictogram field and text descriptors: Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum;

characters and Braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. Text descriptions shall be located

directly below the pictogram field; and shall comply with the requirements for raised characters

and Braille. (11B-703.6)

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Interior Flat Signs:

1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.

2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.

3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.


2.3 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SIGNS

A. See drawings for additional requirements, if any.

B. ADA-Compliant Interior and Exterior Signage, Borderless:

1. See drawings for overall requirements for size, style, layout, and braille requirements.

2. Sign Thickness: 1/4 inch thick or 1/2 inch thick as indicated on drawings.

3. Construction: One-piece and two-piece with inserts; added-on or engraved characters not

acceptable.

4. Lettering Style: Avenir by Adobe.

5. Braille: California contracted Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or

numbers.

6. Performance: Non-static, fire-retardant, and self-extinguishing.

7. Contrast: Letters numbers and symbols shall contrast with background.

8. Corners: Square and round as drawn.

9. Color of Plastic: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

10. Finish of Plastic: Matte.

11. Color of Background: As selected from manufacturer's standard paint colors.

12. Letter and Number Sizes: See drawings.

13. Sign Margins: Letters and numbers, 1/2 inch left margin and 3/8 inch top margin.

14. Sign Sizes: See drawings.

C. Fire Evacuation, Area of Rescue Assistance and Specialty Signs:

1. Style: Fire Evacuation and Area of Rescue Assistance Signs by Best Sign Systems.




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 5

2. Emergency Exit Only Signs: 18-1/2 by 6-1/2 inches 'MP' plastic with copy raised with

background and symbol painted 2 standard paint colors.

3. Lettering Style: Typeface as selected, upper case.

4. Letter and Number Size: As selected.

5. Lettering Location: Centered on sign..

6. Symbol Height: As selected.

7. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or numbers.

8. Corners: Square.

D. Nonilluminated Message-Strip Directories: Extruded-aluminum profiled frame at top and bottom,

with sheet metal rear cover, housing changeable message strips in configuration indicated.

1. Frame:

a. Top and Bottom Profile: Square.

b. Side Trim: Aluminum angle.

c. Depth: Manufacturer's standard 1-1/2- to 2-1/2-inch (38- to 64-mm) frame depth.

d. Profile Face Dimension: 6 inches (152 mm) high.

e. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic.

f. Cover: Removable, clear acrylic sheet held in place by perimeter frame. Provide

suction cup tool for cover removal.

g. Number of Columns: As indicated on Drawings.

h. Mounting: Surface.

i. Header: Copy applied to top section of profiled frame.

j. Divider Color: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs

1. Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil (0.076- to 0.089-mm) thick, weather-

resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on-site

alignment and application.

2. Substrate: Glass

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation.

B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards.

B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper

installation.




SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 6

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces

using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system.

1. Mounting: Mount with vinyl foam tape where possible.

a. Where exposed fasteners are required, use stainless steel or painted to match sign.

B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1

SECTION 10 28 00

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility/janitor rooms.


A. Coordinate the work with the placement of all required internal wall reinforcement, concealed

ceiling supports, and reinforcement of all toilet accessories and toilet partitions to receive anchor

attachments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment

methods for the following items: (See Drawings for all other items not listed below)

1. Grab Bars

2. Mirrors

3. Soap Dispensers

4. Paper Towel Dispenser

5. Toilet Paper Dispenser

6. Warm Air Dryers

7. Mop Holders

C. Samples: Submit one sample of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. These will be

returned after installation.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring

special attention.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products listed are made by Elkay, Georgia Pacific, Bobrick or Dyson.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.





2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.

3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with

anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

1. Grind welded joints smooth.

2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide four keys for each accessory to the City of Glendale; master key all lockable

accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/2275

coating.

F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective

and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.

G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.

I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.

2.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Warm air hand dryers, touchless dispensers, and other electric toilet accessories shall be UL listed.

B. Coordinate requirements for power wiring with electrical subcontractor.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: NO.4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous

metal and fastening devices.





2.5 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. See Toilet Accessory Keynotes on drawings for description.

B. Under sink Piping Covers: Soft resilient molded vinyl.

1. Wall: 1/8 inch with internal ribs.

2. Durometer: 70-80 - Shore A.

3. Burning Characteristics: Self-extinguishing 0 seconds.

4. Color: White.

5. Product: Lav Guard 2 manufactured by Truebro, Inc, www.truebro.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify that electrical connections have been properly coordinated.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on

drawings.

END OF SECTION




COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 1

SECTION 12 36 60

COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Specimen warranty.

C. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork

standards,

D. Furnish a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on the first page of the shop drawings.

E. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of

cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,

representing actual product, color, and patterns.

G. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.

H. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

I. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair

of countertop surfaces.

J. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information








A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.

B. Monitored Compliance

1. Millwork and the installation thereof for this project shall be monitored for compliance to

the contract documents by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services.

a. Full particulars of the Woodwork Institute Monitored Compliance Program may be

found at the Institute web site at www.woodworkinstitute.com. or by calling the

administrative office at 9163729943.

2. Schedule inspections by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services at the

beginning of fabrication, at the time of delivery, at the beginning of installation, at

completion, and such additional times as the Director of Architectural Services considers

appropriate.

a. A written report shall be issued to all parties at the conclusion of each inspection.

3. Millwork and/or installation found to be non compliant (and not corrected) will be rejected.

4. Issuance of a Monitored Compliance Certificate is a prerequisite of acceptance.

5. Fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Monitored Compliance program are the

responsibility of the millwork manufacturer and/or installer and shall be included in their

bid

C. Quality Certification: Provide AWl Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality

certification of completed work.

1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS

Grade or Grades specified.

2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.

3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.

4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and

products meet the specified requirements.

5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.

6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

D. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental

conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Quality Standard: See Section 06 41 00.

B. Solid Surfacing Countertops:

1. Homogeneous quartz surfaces material.

2. Thickness: 2 cm, minimum for vertical installation and 3 cm for horizontal installation.

3. Seam Width: less than 1/8” unless otherwise speifcied

4. Sinks and Bowls: undermount or as indicated on drawings

5. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.

6. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. H.

Performance characteristics: Zodiaq® physical properties data sheet:

Property Typical Result Test Procedure

Flexural Strength >5,300 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Modulus 5.3–5.7E6 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Elongation >0.1% ASTM D 790

Compression Strength (Dry) ~27,000 psi ASTM C 170

Compression Strength (Wet) ~24,000 psi ASTM C 170

Hardness 7 Mohs’ Hardness Scale

Thermal Expansion 1.45 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696

Gloss (60° Gardner) 45–50 ANSI Z 124

Colorfastness Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.1

Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.3

Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z 124.6

(stain 5.2, chemical 5.5,

cigarette 5.4 resistances)

Fungal and Bacterial Resistance No growth ASTM G 21 & G 22

High Temperature None to slight effect NEMA LD 3.3.6*

Resistance (356°F)

Boiling Water Resistance None to slight effect NEMA LD 3.3.5*

Freeze-Thaw Cycling Unaffected ASTM C 1026

Point Impact Passes ANSI Z 124.6.4.2

Ball Impact 164 inches NEMA LD 3.3.8*

Slip Resistance Above 0.80 for textured models ASTM C 1028

Static Coefficient of Friction 0.89/0.61 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028

(as received)

Static Coefficient of Friction 0.87/0.65 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028

(with renovator)

Abrasion Resistance 139 ASTM C 501

Specific Gravity 2.44 ASTM D 792

Density ~2400 kg/m3

Water Absorption 0.12% ASTM C 373

Long- and Short-Term <0.04% ASTM D 570

Moisture Expansion <0.01% on average ASTM C 370

Toxicity Passes, LC50=68–128 Pittsburgh Protocol

Flammability For all colors tested ASTM E 84,

UL 723

(Class I and Class A) and NFPA 255

Flame Spread Index FSI <10 for 3 cm and <15 for 2 cm





Smoke Developed Index SDI <50 for 3 cm and <100 for 2 cm

Nominal Thickness 2 cm and 3 cm

Nominal Weight 10 lb./ft.2 (2 cm)

15 lb./ft.2 (3 cm)

* NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000

C. Manufacturers:

1. Dupont: Zodiaq Quartz Surfaces as basis of design

http://www.dupont.com/products-and-services/construction-materials/surface-design-

materials/brands/zodiaq-quartz-surfaces.html

2. Or Equal

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;

minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of

materials being joined.

C. Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit between

splash and wall; 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch.

1. Color: As indicated on drawings.

D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

E. Sink/bowl mounting hardware: Manufacturer’s approved bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners

for attachment of undermount sinks/bowls.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.

3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.

1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.

2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive

sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim

where required.

B. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product

installation details.

1. Tops:

a. Flat and true to within 1/8" (3 mm) of a flat surface over a 10' length.

b. Allow a minimum of 1/16" to a maximum of 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between surface

and each wall.

C. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joint widths no greater than

1/8" (3 mm) in finished work.

1. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.

D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

1. Where indicated use rubber cove molding.

2. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.

B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.

C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.





3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL

85094

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

210500 - 1

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Sleeves.

4. Escutcheons.

5. Grout.

6. Painting and finishing.

7. Access to mechanical work.

8. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:


B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, “Structural

Welding Code - Steel.”

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, “Code for Pressure Piping.”

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for fire protection installations.


85094


210500 - 2

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured in place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire protection items requiring access

that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in

Division 08 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining

methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.

b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type

and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.


85094


210500 - 3

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain

ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely

fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers

opening.

B. One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome plated

finish.

C. One Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome plated.

D. Split Casting, Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.


E. One Piece, Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome

plated finish.

G. One Piece, Floor Plate Type: Cast iron floor plate.

H. Split Casting, Floor Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.


85094


210500 - 4

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.7 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS

A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Sections “Access Doors and Frames.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” and Division 02 Section “Selective

Structure Demolition” for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire protection systems, equipment, and components

indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment

operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and

quality.

D. Patch existing construction where disturbed by work of this Division.

1. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work

involved. Patching and remodeling work shall conform to the standards of the

specifications of the Project, where applicable; where not specified, work shall conform

to the highest standards of the trade.

2. Existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work shall be repaired to

an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying

piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Because of the small scale of the

drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be

required. Furnish all fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such

conditions.


85094


210500 - 5

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at required slopes to drain system.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions,

and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings

below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. PVC sleeves are

prohibited in air plenums.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum board

partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to

extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section

“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or

pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.

M. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve

for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble


85094


210500 - 6

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.

N. Underground, Exterior Wall or Slab on Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron “wall pipes”

for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow

for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.





seal.

O. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07

Section “Penetration Firestopping” for materials.

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.

Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in

requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Painting of fire protection systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Sections “Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”


85094


210500 - 7

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor fire protection materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire protection equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other

equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

3.7 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A. Provide access panels for any device that requires access for servicing and/or maintenance.

Coordinate locations with General Contractor.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of access doors, floor doors, and

removable access plates.

C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level

in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

D. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

E. Remove or replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



85094

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 – WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Sprinklers.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and

that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from

sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys

frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.


A. Standard Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175 psig minimum working pressure.

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses

through water service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

b. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. Churches: Light Hazard.

d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

e. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

f. Laundries: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

g. Libraries except Stack Areas: Light Hazard.

h. Library Stack Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

i. Machine Shops: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

j. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

k. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

l. Printing Plants: Extra Hazard, Group 1.

m. Repair Garages: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

n. Residential Living Areas: Light Hazard.

o. Restaurant Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

p. Solvent Cleaning Areas: Extra Hazard, Group 2.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Residential (Dwelling) Occupancy: 0.05 gpm over 400 sq. ft. area.

b. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.

c. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.

d. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.


85094


211313 - 2

e. Extra Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500 sq. ft. area.

f. Extra Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500 sq. ft. area.

g. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Minimum Density for Deluge Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over entire area.

b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over entire area.

c. Extra Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over entire area.

d. Extra Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over entire area.

e. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

6. Total Combined Hose Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing

shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”

2. NFPA 13R, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and

Including Four Stories in Height.”


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner’s written

permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,

including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


85094


211313 - 3

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in “Piping Schedule” Article for applications of pipe, tube, and

fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B.

Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Thinwall Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,

threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10.

Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Schedule 10, Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5

and smaller; and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

D. Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,

standard weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

F. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard

pattern.

G. Malleable or Ductile Iron Unions: UL 860.

H. Cast Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

I. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

J. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

K. Grooved Joint, Steel Pipe Appurtenances:


following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile iron casting; with dimensions matching

steel pipe.


85094


211313 - 4

4. Grooved End Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,

EPDM rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

L. Steel Pressure Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM approved, 175 psig pressure rating with steel housing,

rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers’ pressure seal tools.


following:

a. Victaulic Company.

M. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick or

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat Face Flanges: Full face gaskets.

2. Class 250, Cast Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised Face Flanges: Ring type

gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard Pressure Piping: 175 psig.

3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High Pressure Piping: 250 psig.

B. Ball Valves:


following:


b. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.

3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze or brass body with threaded ends.

4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze or brass body with threaded ends or ductile iron

body with grooved ends.

5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile iron body with grooved ends.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or “Approval Guide,”

published by FM Global, listing.


B. Angle Valves:


85094


211313 - 5


following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:


following:


b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Potter Roemer.

g. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

h. Victaulic Company.

i. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

D. Globe Valves:


following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

E. Plug Valves:


following:

a. Southern Manufacturing Group.

2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


following:




2. Standard: UL 213.


4. Body Material: Ductile iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical T and cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain end pipe, or threaded.

B. Adjustable Drop Nipples:


following:

a. CECA, LLC.

b. Corcoran Piping System Co.


85094


211313 - 6

c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM rubber O-ring seals.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Length: Adjustable.

7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3. Victaulic Company.

4. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or “Approval Guide,”

published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.

3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

4. Pressure Rating for High Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat Responsive Element:

1. Early Suppression, Fast Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

3. Residential Applications: UL 1626.

4. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

“Ordinary” temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by

application.

D. Open Sprinklers with Heat Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Characteristics:

a. Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.

b. Nominal 17/32-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.

E. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.

2. Painted.

F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome plated steel, one piece, flat.

G. Sprinkler Guards:


following:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.


85094


211313 - 7



d. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated finish with set screws.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with chrome plated

finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel Escutcheons: Chrome plated finish with set screw or spring clips.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated or rough brass finish with

concealed hinge and set screw.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Escutcheons: Chrome plated finish with concealed rivet hinge, set

screw or spring clips.

G. One Piece Floor Plates: Cast iron flange with holes for fasteners.

H. Split Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.9 SLEEVES

A. Cast Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

C. Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated,

plain ends.




2.10 SLEEVE SEALS


following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Metraflex, Inc.

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


85094


211313 - 8

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space


1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating or stainless

steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.11 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic cement

grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings

that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system’s pressure rating for

aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


85094


211313 - 9

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.


damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes

and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized steel pipe.

I. Steel Piping, Cut Grooved Joints: Cut square edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe

and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel pipe joints.

J. Steel Piping, Roll Grooved Joints: Roll rounded edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe

and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel pipe grooved joints.

3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or

sidewall, wet type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling

grid.

3.5 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

D. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation

using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements

for joint sealants in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”


85094


211313 - 10

E. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using

joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for

joint sealants in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”

F. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using

sleeve seals.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and

pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Galvanized steel pipe.

2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas

or Other Wet Areas: Galvanized steel pipe.

a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.

b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.


extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for

flashing in Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”

3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum Board Partitions:

a. Galvanized steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Galvanized steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for

individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Galvanized steel pipe.

5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:


b. Cast iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.

6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:


b. Galvanized steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

3.7 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water service piping entries into

building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in

center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe

and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and

make watertight seal.


85094


211313 - 11

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.

B. Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test

valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data

nameplates shall be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, “Systems Acceptance”

Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.

6. Coordinate with fire pump tests. Operate as required.

7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified

fittings.

B. Standard pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end

fittings for steel piping; grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

2. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain end pipe

fittings.

3. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded

joints.

C. Standard pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the

following:


85094


211313 - 12

1. Standard weight, black steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard weight, black steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end


4. Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with cut grooved ends; galvanized, grooved end


5. Standard weight, black steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded

joints.

6. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end


7. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded

joints.

3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Typical sprinkler type to existing sprinkler heads.

3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory painted white cover plate.

2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

4. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed

to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.



85094

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Transition fittings.

3. Dielectric fittings.


5. Sleeves.

6. Escutcheons.

7. Grout.

8. Plumbing demolition.

9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.


11. Access to mechanical work.

12. Excavating for mechanical work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS













C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and

connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If

minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with

requirements.


85094


220500 - 2


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,


moisture.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Mechanical drawings are symbolic and diagrammatic and are intended to show only the general

scheme, equipment involved and the approximate locations of materials and equipment.

Coordinate installation of systems with other trades to avoid conflicts. Notify Engineer of

unresolvable conflicts prior to fabrication and installation of systems.

B. Obtain dimensions from the Architectural drawings wherever possible instead of scaling the

Mechanical drawings. Consult the Architectural drawings for details of construction, location

of suspended ceilings and other pertinent information. Architect’s drawings, however, shall not

take precedence over field measurements. Carefully investigate the structural and finish

conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly.

C. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and

accessories, which may be required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be

required to meet such conditions.

D. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place


F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that

are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08

Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.



B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless



85094


220500 - 3

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face



D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,

unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall


H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with

ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer’s

Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-

cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer’s SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include

brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-

joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.


85094


220500 - 4

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working

pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-

face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic

washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;

plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following manufacturers.


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.





4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length


element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.


C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain


D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include




85094


220500 - 5



2.7 ESCUTCHEONS



opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-

plated finish.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,


2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.



A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

2.10 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. Backfill Materials:

1. Subbase Material: Graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag.

2. Finely-graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed

slag, with 100% passing 3/8 inch sieve.

3. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to required densities, and

complying with AASHO Designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5 or A-3.

4. Drainage Fill Material: Washed and uniformly graded gravel, crushed stone or crushed

slag, with 100% passing 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5% passing No. 4 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION




85094


220500 - 6

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to

be removed.








operational.





quality.










piping systems.



loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Because of the small scale of the

drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories, which may be

required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such

conditions.

C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

D. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,




other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings




85094


220500 - 7

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between



prohibited in plenums.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.


Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to







F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve



2. Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.





seal.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall or Slab-On-Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes”


for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.





seal.

H. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors



I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

J. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.






85094


220500 - 8


assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook,” using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube”

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and


H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service


I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or

paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to

pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.


85094


220500 - 9

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections

“Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and


3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment

base plates, and anchors.












85094


220500 - 10







3.9 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so

that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.

B. Excavate with vertical sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise

indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations.

Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not

endanger work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance

below finished grade to not interfere with other work.

C. Width: Excavate for piping with 6 inch to 9 inch clearance on both sides of pipe, except where

otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other

work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working

clearances.

D. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not

excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations. Except

as otherwise indicated, support the following work on undisturbed soil at bottom of excavations.

E. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6 inch pipe size and larger), tanks, and where

indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in depth

indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 6 inch below bottom of work to be supported.

F. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where directed because of unsatisfactory soil

condition at bottom of indicated excavation, excavate additional depth as directed to reach

satisfactory soil- bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed, to

indicated excavation depth. Refer to Division 1 for change order procedure on additional work,

including additional excavating and backfilling.

G. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water-bearing

piping (water, steam condensate, drainage) so that top of piping will not be less than

7 foot-6 inch vertical distance below finished grade.

H. Excavate near large trees (within drip line) by hand, and protect root system from damage or

dryout to greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed

roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch diameter and larger with asphaltic tree paint.

I. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner which will not interfere with

or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line).

1. Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material.


85094


220500 - 11

2. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling

or does not comply with requirements for backfill material.

3. Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in lawful manner.

3.10 DEWATERING

A. Maintain dry excavations for mechanical work, by removing water. Protect excavations from

inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations; protect

excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and water

proofing. Provide adequate barriers which will protect other excavations and below-grade

property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through mechanical work

excavations.

3.11 BASE PREPARATION

A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and

compact by tamping to form firm base for work. For piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks, and

similar work, shape subbase to fit shape of bottom 90 of cylinder, for uniform continuous

support.

1. Provide finely-graded subbase material for wrapped, coated, and plastic pipe and tanks.

B. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged

connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems.

C. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2 foot-6 inch below surface of

roadway, provide 4 inch base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is installed and

tested, provide 4 inch thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. Provide

Class 2500 concrete for encasement and slab.

D. Previous Excavations: Where piping crosses over area more than 5 foot-0 inch wide which has

been previously excavated to greater depth than required for piping installation, provide suitable

subsidence- proof support for piping. Comply with details shown or, where not otherwise

shown, provide one of the following support systems:

1. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in width equal to pipe diameter plus 2 foot-0 inch. Install

8 inch courses of subbase material, each compacted to 95% of maximum density, as

required to fill excavation and support piping.

2. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in width equal to pipe diameter plus 1 foot-0 inch. Install

lean concrete fill to required elevation for support of piping.

3.12 BACKFILLING

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing

is indicated.

B. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to uniform firm density.

C. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6 inch above wrapped, coated, and plastic

piping and tanks, and to centerline of other tanks.


85094


220500 - 12

D. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may

be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil

materials.

E. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of mechanical work, and compact simultaneously; do

not dislocate work from installed positions.

F. Backfill excavations in 8 inch high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the

following densities (% of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven

hand-operated compaction equipment.

1. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: 85% for cohesive soils, 90% for cohesionless soils.

2. Paved Areas, Other than Roadways: 90% for cohesive soils; 95% for cohesionless soils.

3. Roadways and Under Building Floor: 90% for cohesive soils; 95% for cohesionless

soils.

G. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at time of backfilling excavations for

mechanical work.

H. Street and yard surfaces shall be restored to their original condition after services are installed.

I. Compaction Tests: Where compaction tests indicate lower densities of backfill than specified,

continue compaction (and re-excavation and backfilling where necessary) and provide

additional testing as directed by Architect/Engineer. Allowable density tolerance is not more

than one-test-out-of-5 falling more than 2 percentage points below specified density.

3.13 PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE, EXCAVATION WORK

A. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observable at mechanical work excavations

during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add

backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment.

B. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and

eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.



85094

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermometers.

2. Gages.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CASE THERMOMETERS


following:

1. Ernst Gage Co.

2. Trerice, H. O. Co.

3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

B. Case: 9 inches long.

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, with magnifying lens.

D. Tube Background: Satin faced, nonreflective with scale markings.

E. Window: Glass or polycarbonate.

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with

locking device.

G. Stem: Copper plated steel or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of

1.5 percent of range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.

B. Description: Pressure tight, socket type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,

diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.


85094


220519 - 2

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES


following:

1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

2. Ernst Gage Co.

3. Trerice, H. O. Co.

4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

B. Direct Mounting, Dial Type Pressure Gages: Indicating dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Dry type, 4-1/2 inch diameter.

2. Pressure Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom outlet type unless back outlet type is

indicated.

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

5. Dial: Satin faced, nonreflective with scale markings.

6. Pointer: Metal.

7. Window: Glass or polycarbonate.

8. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.

9. Vacuum Pressure Range: 30 in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.

10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

C. Pressure Gage Fittings:

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless steel needle type.

2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion resistant, porous metal

disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A. Install thermometers in the outlet of each domestic hot water heater or hot water storage tank.

B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install dry case type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure reducing valve.

3.3 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install direct mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical

position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.

C. Install direct mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most

readable position.


85094


220519 - 3

D. Install needle valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.

E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and

maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.



85094

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general duty valves:

1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Copper alloy ball valves.

3. Bronze check valves.

4. Spring loaded, lift disc check valves.

5. Bronze gate valves.

6. Bronze globe valves.


1. Division 22 Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for valve tags

and charts.

2. Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;

valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;

dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include

rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and

accessories.


A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and

design criteria.

B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable water service.

C. MSS Standard Practices: Comply with the following standards for valves:

1. MSS SP-45: Bypass and Drain Connection Standard.

2. MSS SP-70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

3. MSS SP-71: Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

4. MSS SP-72: Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Service.

5. MSS SP-78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

6. MSS SP-80: Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves.

7. MSS SP-84: Steel Valves - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends.

8. MSS SP-85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

9. MSS SP-92: MSS Valve User Guide.


85094


220523 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following

requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for applications of valves.

B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuators:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter turn types.

2. Lever Handle: For quarter turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.

3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every

10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.

G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and

ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate,

and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.3 COPPER ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

e. Grinnell Corporation.

f. Hammond Valve.


85094


220523 - 3

g. Honeywell Braukmann.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Three Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

b. Grinnell Corporation.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. NIBCO INC.

B. Copper Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

C. Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, chrome plated bronze ball;

TFE seats; and 600 psig minimum CWP rating and blowout proof stem.

D. Three Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, chrome plated bronze ball;

TFE seats; and 600 psig minimum CWP rating and blowout proof stem.

2.4 BRONZE CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co.




e. Walworth Co.

2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Grinnell Corporation.

b. Kitz Corporation of America.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co.




e. Grinnell Corporation.

f. Hammond Valve.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc

and bronze seat.

D. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and

bronze seat.


85094


220523 - 4

E. Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and

bronze seat.

2.5 SPRING LOADED, LIFT DISC CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Wafer Lift Disc Check Valves:

a. Mueller Steam Specialty.

2. Type II, Compact Wafer, Lift Disc Check Valves:

a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.

b. Flomatic Valves.

c. GA Industries, Inc.

d. Grinnell Corporation.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Metraflex Co.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. Mueller Steam Specialty.

i. Multiplex Manufacturing Co.

j. NIBCO INC.

k. SSI Equipment, Inc.

l. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.

m. Valve and Primer Corp.

3. Type IV, Threaded Lift Disc Check Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation.

b. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. Mueller Steam Specialty.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Lift Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze

or alloy seat.

C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast iron shell with

diameter matching companion flanges.

D. Type II, Class 125, Compact Wafer, Lift Disc Check Valves: Compact wafer style with cast

iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.

E. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and

threaded ends.

2.6 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising Stem Gate Valves:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.



85094


220523 - 5

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. Powell, Wm. Co.

i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous alloy handwheel.

C. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid

wedge and union ring bonnet.

2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:





e. Hammond Valve.


g. NIBCO INC.

h. Stockham.

2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:





e. Hammond Valve.


g. NIBCO INC.

h. Stockham.

B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous alloy handwheel.

C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and union ring

bonnet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance.


B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.


85094


220523 - 6

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,

use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, or globe valves.

3. Pump Discharge: Spring loaded, lift disc check valves.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher

CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125 or 150, bronze.

2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125 or 250, cast iron.

3. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Two or three piece, 600 psig CWP rating, copper

alloy.

4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze.

5. Swing Check Valves: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.

6. Grooved End, Ductile Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175 psig CWP

rating.

7. Spring Loaded, Lift Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125

minimum.

8. Spring Loaded, Lift Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125,

cast iron.

9. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 150, bronze.

10. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze mounted cast iron.

11. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.

12. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze mounted cast iron.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and plug

valves for throttling duty.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.


85094


220523 - 7

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.


A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for basic piping joint

construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts

according to coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy

solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.



85094

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and

equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.

7. Pipe positioning systems.

8. Equipment supports.


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and

installation of supports and anchors.

B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products that are UL listed and FM approved.

C. MSS Standard Compliance:

1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply

with ANSI/MSS SP-58.

2. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.


85094



220529 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components. Refer to Part 3

“Hanger and Support Applications” Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.

5. Grinnell Corp.

6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

C. Copper Clad Hangers: For use with copper piping.

D. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

E. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

F. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of

bearing surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from

structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.


following:


2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.

3. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.

4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.4 THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100 psig minimum, compressive strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal

shield.


85094



220529 - 3


following:



3. Pipe Shields, Inc.

C. Insulation Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium

silicate.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient

air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert wedge type zinc coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion

resistant components to support roof mounted piping.

2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in

pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural steel

shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.



85094



220529 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems

and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings or copper clad hangers on attachments for electrolytic protection

where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,

NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or 2 Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.


85094



220529 - 5

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion

support and cast iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from

2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if

small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical


21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to

NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4

to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads.


85094



220529 - 6

10. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts or Wood Blocking: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.


85094



220529 - 7

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


N. Use powder actuated fasteners or mechanical expansion anchors instead of building attachments

where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building

structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Thermal Hanger Shield or Wood Block Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for

insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual.

2. Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not

penetrate roof membrane.

F. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures”

for plumbing fixtures.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,

expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.


85094



220529 - 8

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

O. Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod size pipe shall be as scheduled below. The

maximum allowable load column includes a safety factor of 5 and is to be used to calculate rod

sizes for trapeze hangers and equipment hanging.

1. Provide hangers for cast iron soil pipe at 5 foot intervals, except 10 foot intervals where

10 foot lengths are used.

2. Provide hangers at 32 inch intervals for plastic pipe.


85094



220529 - 9

3. Hanger Schedule:

Pipe Size Steel Copper Min. Rod Diameter

& Max. allow. load

1/2” & 3/4” 7’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

1” & 1-1/4” 6’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

1-1/2” 9’ 6’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

2-1/2” 10’ 9’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.

3” & larger 10’ 10’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.

3/4” 2710 lbs.

7/8” 3770 lbs.


A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.


85094



220529 - 10

HANGER AND SUPPORT TYPE CHART


85094



220529 - 11



85094

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING


220548 - 1

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing piping and equipment vibration controls as herein specified:

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION DESIGNATION

A. Refer to the following vibration isolation designation for description. See Equipment Isolation

Schedule at end of this section for type and deflection.

B. TYPE A NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR


following:

a. Mason Industries.

b. Peabody Noise Control Inc.

c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

d. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.

2. Neoprene cylinders with provision for bolting to equipment and structure if required.

C. TYPE B SPRING MOUNTING WITH VERTICAL LIMIT STOPS


following:



c. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.

2. Free standing with sound deadening pads and leveling bolts with limit stops. Spring

diameter-to-compressed operating spring height ratio 1:1. Spring loaded minimum

additional available travel 50% of rated deflection.


85094



220548 - 2

D. TYPE C NEOPRENE AND SPRING


following:


b. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.

2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring diameter to

compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or greater. Spring loaded minimum

additional available travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring diameter and hanger box hole

large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the

box.

E. TYPE D SPRING


following:


b. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.

2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene hanger in series. Precompressed by

the manufacturer to the rated deflection to keep piping or equipment at a fixed elevation

during installation. Spring diameter to compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or

greater. Spring loaded minimum additional travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring

diameter and hanger box hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a

30 degree arc before contacting the box.

F. TYPE F BRAIDED HOSE


following:

a. Flex/Flo.

b. Flexact.

c. Flexonics.

d. Mason Industries.

e. Metraflex.

f. Minnesota Flexible Corp.

g. Twin City Hose.

2. Flexible stainless steel Type 321 hose and braided cover with carbon steel ends.

2-1/2 inch pipe size and smaller - male nipples. 3 inch pipe size and larger - 150 pound

ASA flanges. Pipe sizes up to and including: 1-1/2 inch pipe - 12 inches long, 3 inch

pipe - 18 inches long, 6 inch pipe - 24 inches long, 8 inch pipe and over - 36 inches long.

Use lengths as required. Install horizontally, where possible, on the equipment side of

shut off valves.

3. Flexible bronze braided hose with copper tube ends for Freon. Install horizontally, where

possible, on the equipment side of shut off valves.

G. TYPE G NEOPRENE CONNECTOR


following:


b. Metraflex.

c. Minnesota Flexible Corp.

d. Red Valve.

e. Twin City Hose.

f. Vibration Mountings & Controls.


85094



220548 - 3

2. Flexible neoprene connectors manufactured from multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric

and neoprene. No steel wire or rings for pressure reinforcement. Connector 2” and

smaller threaded ends. 2-1/2 inches and larger - floating steel 150 pound ASA flanges

minimum pressure rating 150 PSI at 220F connector configuration straight line and 90

elbow. Connectors with two sphere design, elbow connectors with one sphere forming

the corner of the joint itself.

H. TYPE H VERTICAL PIPING ANCHOR AND GUIDE ISOLATORS


following:


2. Acoustical pipe anchor and guide isolators consisting of telescopic arrangement of two

sizes steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and

duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints by similar method to prevent

vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material not to exceed

500 PSI with a balanced design for equal resistance in any direction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast in place anchors to verify actual locations before

installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION

A. Provide hose or connector isolators on suction and discharge of all rotating and reciprocating

equipment.

B. Mount close coupled pumps on rails extended beyond the pump housing.

C. Provide horizontally split pump bases complete with base elbow supports at the discharge and

suction.

D. Galvanize isolator body and cadmium plate isolator springs in outdoor applications.

E. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

F. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

3.3 PIPING ISOLATION

A. Isolate all piping connected to isolated mechanical equipment within the confines of the

mechanical equipment room but for not less than 50 feet. Isolator types will be as follows:


85094



220548 - 4

B. Spring deflections - first 3 supports - equal to connected isolated equipment but not less than

0.75 inch. Balance of supports 0.75 inch deflection.

C. Floor mounted Type B.

D. Ceiling suspended Type D (first 3 supports) and Type C thereafter.

E. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.


3.4 RISER ISOLATION

A. Suspend or support risers by Type D hangers or Type B mountings and anchor or guide risers

with Type H isolators. Minimum spring deflections of 0.75 inch except in those expansion

locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load transfer to plus or

minus 25% of initial stress.

B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

PART 4 - EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE


Equipment Location Isolation

Type

Total

Deflection

Suspended Water Pumps Mechanical Rooms D 1.0 inch



85094

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING


220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Pipe labels.

3. Plastic tape.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling

and include used stencils in maintenance materials.


A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of

identification devices.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


85094



220553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering

two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless steel self tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment’s unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2 by 11 inch (A4)

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated plans, details, and schedules. Equipment schedule shall be included in

operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact type, permanent adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard color coded pressure sensitive (self adhesive) vinyl tape, not

less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers for pipes 6 inches or larger and provide 3/4 inch

wide tape markers for pipes less than 6 inches.

C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.


85094



220553 - 3

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter

height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational

instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless


2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved, 1-1/2 inch diameter, with 1/4 inch letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2 inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11 inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate

valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve

(room or space), normal operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2. For each page of the valve schedule, provide a glazed display frame, with screws for

removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of rigid plastic or extruded

aluminum, with clear plastic glazing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of plumbing equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section “Interior Painting.”

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe

labels, at Installer’s option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color coded bands or

rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.


85094



220553 - 4

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

3.4 VALVE TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within

factory fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn watering hose

connections; and similar roughing in connections of end use fixtures and units. List tagged

valves in a valve schedule.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Calcium silicate.

b. Cellular glass.

c. Flexible elastomeric.

d. Mineral fiber.

e. Polystyrene.

2. Field applied fabric reinforcing mesh.

3. Field applied jackets.


1. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 2

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and

equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop

Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field

applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Calcium Silicate:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.

2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply

with ASTM C 533, Type I.

3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for

dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied

Jackets” Article.


a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.

b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.

4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory Applied ASJ Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type II, Class 2.

6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 3

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

I. Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory applied jacket

requirements are specified in “Factory Applied Jackets” Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; All Service Duct Wrap.

J. Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

K. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation.

Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall

not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according

to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.

b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.

2.2 FIELD APPLIED FABRIC REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count

of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

B. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread

count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.

C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by

10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.


a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.3 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 4

B. PVC Jacket: High impact resistant, UV resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.

4. Factory fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45 and 90 degree, short and long radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

3. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 5

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and

specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,

spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor barrier mastic over staples.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 6

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to

maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping” and fire

resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 7

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “UNION”.

Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing

sealant.

3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 inch overlap at seams and joints.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 8

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062 inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint

jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.

3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. COLD PIPE Insulation Thickness (inch) (Based on K value of 4.0 to 4.6)

PIPE SIZE (inch)

SERVICE Runouts* 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger

Domestic Cold Water

**** 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1

* Runouts 2 inch pipe size and smaller and 12 ft. long or less.

** Includes drain body, rise to drain, horizontal pipes, and vertical pipes only within 18 inches of drain body.

*** Includes drain body, rise to drain, all horizontal and vertical pipes.

**** May be fiberglass or equal “R” value of flexible elastomeric.

***** Shall be fiberglass.

B. HOT PIPE Insulation Thickness - Fiberglass (inch) (Based on thermal resistance of 4.0 to 4.6)

PIPE SIZE (inch)

FLUID TEMP. RANGE 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger

Domestic Hot Water

105°F to 180°F

(*) (**)

1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5

* Flexible elastomeric acceptable.

** Insulate non circulating domestic hot water runouts 2 inch and smaller with 1/2 inch thickness.

3.9 INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the

field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.


85094

PLUMBING INSULATION

220700 - 9

3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE






85094

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.


1. Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers, pressure

gages, and fittings.

2. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties” for water distribution piping

specialties.

3. Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality control test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of State Plumbing Code

pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.

C. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9,” for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 “Pipe and Fitting Applications” Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and

joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting

the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be

joined.

2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PLASTIC PIPE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2672.

1. PVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM D2464, ASTM D2466, ASTM D2467.

2. PVC pipe shall conform to NSF 61.


85094


221116 - 2

3. Minimum working pressure rating of 160 psi.

2.3 DUCTILE IRON WATER PIPE

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, AWWA C115.

1. All ductile iron water service piping and fittings shall be cement mortar lined in

accordance with AWWA C104.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: AWWA C110, AWWA C153.

3. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to NSF 61.

4. Minimum working pressure rating of 160 psi.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), water tube,

annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube,

drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or

ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and

bolts and nuts.

2.5 VALVES

A. Bronze and cast iron, general duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section “General Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping.”

B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping

Specialties.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work

Results for Plumbing.”


85094


221116 - 3

3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved end piping.

D. Fitting Option: Extruded tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper

tubing.

E. Aboveground Domestic Water Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the

Building: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. Hard copper tube, Type L; and soldered joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast

iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast

iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot Water Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose end drain valves.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures

that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use

butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,

and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot water circulation return branch and discharge side of each

pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball

valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work


B. Install under building slab copper tubing according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook.”


85094


221116 - 4

C. Install cast iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22

Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

D. Install shutoff valve, hose end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside

the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in

Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping,” and drain valves and strainers are

specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”

E. Install water pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water pressure regulators are

specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”

F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.

G. Rough in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company’s

requirements.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common

Work Results for Plumbing.”

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy


C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved end pipe or grooved end tube coupling housing,

gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written

instructions.

D. Extruded Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool

designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating

stop, and braze branch tube into collar.


A. Provide pipe hanger and support devices complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and

Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”

B. Provide vibration controls complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.


85094


221116 - 5

D. Connect domestic water piping to water service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and

connect to the following:

1. Booster Pumps: Cold water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Cold water supply and hot water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold and hot water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures.”

4. Equipment: Cold and hot water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use

flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must

be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.


85094


221116 - 6

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball type balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping to

provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,

extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,

if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



85094

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Balancing valves.

3. Strainers.

4. Drain valves.

5. Water hammer arresters.

6. Air vents.

7. Trap seal primer valves.

8. Trap seal primer systems.


1. Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers, pressure

gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping” for water meters.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise

indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,” for plastic

domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9.”


85094


221119 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe Applied, Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers:


following:

a. Ames Co.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. Rain Bird Corporation.

d. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001.

3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers:


following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Legend Valve.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

e. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.


3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:


following:


b. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.


3. Operation: Continuous pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.2 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory Stop Balancing Valves:


85094


221119 - 3


following:





e. Hammond Valve.


g. NIBCO INC.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two piece, copper alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.

4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

5. Body: Copper alloy.

6. Port: Full port.

7. Ball: Chrome plated brass.

8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

10. Handle: Vinyl covered steel with memory setting device.

2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valve Type, Hose End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard port, two piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.


85094


221119 - 4

e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Copper tube with piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.6 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

B. Welded Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Stainless steel.

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum pressure rating.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply Type, Trap Seal Primer Valves:


following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.



4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

B. Drainage Type, Trap Seal Primer Valves:


following:

a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.

3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.

4. Material: Chrome plated, cast brass.


85094


221119 - 5

2.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. Trap Seal Primer Systems:


following:

a. PPP Inc.


3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water tubing.

4. Cabinet: Recessed mounting steel box with stainless steel cover.

5. Electric Controls: 24 hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120 V ac power.

6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping joining

materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure reducing valve and

pump.

D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor

drain.

F. Install supply type, trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

G. Install drainage type, trap seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down

toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

H. Install trap seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of

1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems.”

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”


85094


221119 - 6

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric vent backflow preventers.

3. Calibrated balancing valves.

4. Supply type, trap seal primer valves.

5. Trap seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section “Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced pressure principle backflow preventer,

double check backflow prevention assembly, and double check detector assembly

backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device’s reference

standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified

above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field adjustable temperature set points of temperature actuated water mixing valves.



85094

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.

3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

B. Provide new sanitary waste service pipe 5’-0” outside the building for extension under another

division.


1. Division 22 Section “Sanitary Sewerage Pumps.”


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.


A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portion of California State Plumbing

Code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.

B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to

products and installation of soil and waste piping systems.

C. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standards

pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems.

D. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,” for plastic

piping components. Include marking with “NSF-dwv” for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;

“NSF-drain” for plastic drain piping; “NSF-tubular” for plastic continuous waste piping; and

“NSF-sewer” for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.


85094


221316 - 2

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated

shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-

steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron

housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve type, reducing or transition type

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion resistant metal

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS (Pending Approval of AHJ)

A. Solid Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.

B. Cellular Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.

C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (Pending Approval of AHJ)

A. Solid Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,

and vent patterns.

B. Cellular Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent

patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Cellular Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent

patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.

2.6 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve type,

reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and

corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.


85094


221316 - 3

1. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full

length, corrosion resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening

mechanism on each end.

C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve type reducing or

transition type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion

resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve type same size as, with pressure rating at

least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

1. Center Sleeve Material: Stainless steel, Ductile iron, Malleable iron.

2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion resistant coating or material.

E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends

complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball joint section and ductile

iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)

with gaskets and restrained type, ductile iron, bell and spigot end sections complying with

AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.

Include AWWA C111, ductile iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

G. Wall Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing

sections for up to 20 degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with

AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for excavating, trenching,

and backfilling. Excavation and backfill is work of this division.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings standard, shielded, couplings; and hubless

coupling joints.

3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.

4. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.

5. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints. PVC piping not

to be installed within return air plenums.


85094


221316 - 4

6. Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining

dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

B. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless steel couplings; and

hubless coupling joints.

3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.


5. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints. PVC piping not

to be installed within return air plenums.



C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless steel couplings; and

hubless coupling joints.


4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.

5. Cellular core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent

cemented joints.




A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work


B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers.

C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force main piping.

D. Install cast iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22

Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

E. Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,”

Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.”

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.


85094


221316 - 5

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8 bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Sleeves are not required for cast iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs on grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.

J. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.

K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

L. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common

Work Results for Plumbing.”

B. Join hub and spigot, cast iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.

C. Join hub and spigot, cast iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Join hubless cast iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook” for hubless coupling joints.

E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy



85094


221316 - 6

F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to

coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,

and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2

and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.


85094


221316 - 7

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside

leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with

water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water. From 15 minutes

before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect

joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps

filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent

stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into

piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap

of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without

introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture

connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of

water based latex paint.



85094

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Backwater valves.

2. Cleanouts.

3. Floor drains.

4. Trench drains.

5. Roof flashing assemblies.

6. Through penetration firestop assemblies.

7. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

8. Flashing materials.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost resistant vent terminals.

C. Field quality control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,” for plastic sanitary

piping specialty components.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:


85094


221319 - 2


following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron, ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for

cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hubless, cast iron soil pipe test tee, Stainless steel tee with side cleanout

as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

7. Closure: Stainless steel plug with seal.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:


following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. Kusel Equipment Co.

c. Oatey.

d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.




h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Body or Ferrule: Stainless steel.

5. Clamping Device: Required.

6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron threads.

8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel bronze, copper alloy, Stainless steel.

9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

10. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

11. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

12. Standard: ASME A112.3.1.

13. Size: Same as connected branch.

14. Housing: Stainless steel.

15. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.

16. Riser: Stainless steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast Iron Floor Drains:


following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co.


85094


221319 - 3

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Prier Products, Inc.




h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Anchor Flange: Required.


8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing check type.

10. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

11. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

12. Top Shape: Round.


14. Funnel: Not required.

15. Trap Material: Bronze.

16. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

17. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.

2.3 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains:


following:

a. Bluecher

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.

4. Flange: Anchor.


6. Outlet: Bottom, end or side as indicated on drawings.

7. Grate Material: Ductile iron.

8. Grate Finish: Painted.


10. Trap Material: Cast iron.

11. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:


85094


221319 - 4


following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 inch thick, lead flashing

collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized steel boot reinforcement

and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2.5 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through Penetration Firestop Assemblies:


following:

a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.

3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.

4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray iron, hubless pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray iron plug-in thermal release harness. Include PVC protective cap

for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub and spigot, cast

iron, soil pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub and spigot riser section; and where required,

increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting.

B. Deep Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

C. Floor Drain, Trap Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal proof design. Include

vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.


85094


221319 - 5

2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights

and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.

3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.

C. Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and

0.04 inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot dip galvanized, mill

phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 mil minimum

thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping joining

materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feetfor piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.


85094


221319 - 6

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

3. Install floor drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

H. Install through penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.

I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

J. Install deep seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, where required.

K. Install floor drain, trap seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

L. Install air gap fittings on draining type backflow preventers and on indirect waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

O. Install frost proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 inch clearance

between vent pipe and roof substrate.

P. Install wood blocking reinforcement for wall mounting type specialties.

Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding

pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS




85094


221319 - 7

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”

F. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



85094

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

223400 - 1

SECTION 223400 – FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:

1. Commercial, atmospheric, storage, gas water heaters.

2. Compression tanks.

3. Water heater accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LP Gas: Liquefied petroleum fuel gas.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial water heater, signed by product

manufacturer.

D. Source quality control test reports.

E. Field quality control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and


G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water

heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product

Requirements.”

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.


85094


223400 - 2

D. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater

storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 01.

2. Where ASME code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned tube

water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

E. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9” for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

1) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

b. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:



2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Atmospheric, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

1. Manufacturers:

a. A.O. Smith.

b. Bradford White Corporation.

c. Lochinvar Corporation.

d. Patterson-Kelly

e. PVI Industries, LLC.

f. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.

g. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.

h. State Industries, Inc.

2. Storage Tank Construction: ASME code steel with 150 psig working pressure rating.


85094


223400 - 3

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings

to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel

and stainless steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and

copper alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

3. Factory Installed, Storage Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: Corrosion resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.

d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls.

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Burner: For use with atmospheric water heaters and for natural gas fuel.

g. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, electric, automatic, gas ignition system.

h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

i. Safety Controls: Automatic, high temperature limit and low water cutoff devices

or systems.

j. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as

heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working pressure

rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

5. Draft Hood: Draft diverter; complying with ANSI Z21.12.

2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Description: Steel, pressure rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory installed,

butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system operating pressure at tank.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AMTROL Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Honeywell Sparco.

d. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.

e. State Industries, Inc.

f. Taco, Inc.

g. Watts Regulator Co.

h. Wessels Co.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air Charging Valve: Factory installed.


85094


223400 - 4

2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in

piping.

B. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

C. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as

great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working pressure rating.

Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

D. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working pressure rating of water

heater.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with

ASME PTC 25.3.

E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer’s factory fabricated steel bracket

for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

F. Drain Pans: Corrosion resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base

of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer’s factory fabricated inlet and outlet piping

arrangement for multiple unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is

capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water

heater.

H. Piping Type Heat Traps: Field fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

I. Neutralization Kit: Provide manufacturer’s condensate neutralizer kit on all condensate drains

before discharge to an approved drain.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME code construction, according

to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and

referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Arrange units so

controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.


85094


223400 - 5

C. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

D. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure

regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

E. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of

safety control.

F. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial water heater,

relief valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward

pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters

without storage. Extend commercial water heater relief valve outlet, with drain piping same as

domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto

closest floor drain.

H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters

that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties”

for hose end drain valves.

I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section “Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers.

J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,

modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include

shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each

water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section “General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping”

for general duty valves and to Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for

thermometers.

K. Install piping type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without

integral or fitting type heat traps.

L. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for

easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems.”

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”


85094


223400 - 6


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.


equipment.

B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified

above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section

“Demonstration and Training.”



85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes conventional plumbing fixtures and related components.


1. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties” floor drains, and specialty

fixtures not included in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fitting: Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower

heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,

fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials

and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.


A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,”

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are

compatible.

C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing

fixtures, trim and accessories:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.

3. Stainless-Steel Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.

4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.6.

6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

7. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.

8. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.

9. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

10. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.


85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 2

11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

12. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.

13. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

14. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:

ASSE 1016.

15. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.

16. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

17. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

18. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.

19. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate rough-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be

installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. Install fixtures at heights

indicated by the Architect and in accordance with Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixtures, trim and accessories were selected as named in the fixture types on the basis of style,

quality, and finish free from flaws and scratches. Subject to compliance with the requirements,

provide products of one of the following:

1. Vitreous China and Enameled Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Kohler.

2. Trim: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Delta-Commercial, Elkay, Josam, Kohler,

Speakman, Stern, Symmons, T & S Brass, Zurn.

3. Water Closet Seats: American Standard, Bemis, Beneke, Church, Kohler, Olsonite.

4. Chair Carriers and Fixture Supports: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Tyler Pipe/Wade, Watts,

Zurn.

5. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just.

6. Shower Heads/Fittings: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Delta-Commercial, Eljer,

Kohler, Leonard, Powers, Speakman, Symmons.

7. Flush Valves: Aquavantage, Sloan, Zurn.

8. Service Receptors/Laundry Tubs: Fiat, Jonespec, Mustee, Stern Williams, Swan, Zurn.

9. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Guardian, Leonard, Powers, Symmons.

10. Stops, Supplies and Traps: Brasscraft, Chicago Faucet, Eljer, Kohler, Zurn.

11. ADA Insulation Kit: Handi Lavguard, Plumberex, Truebro.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Stainless Steel Fixtures: Sink bowls shall be at least the depth specified, and finish shall be at

least quality of the sink named.

B. Stop valves shall be loose key stuffing box type polished chrome plated. Supply risers shall be

polished chrome plated flexible copper.

C. Exposed traps, unless otherwise noted, shall be 17 gauge chrome plated brass tubing adjustable

traps with cleanout. No slip joint shall occur below the level of the weir of the trap. Unions on

the sewer side of the trap shall be ground, metal to metal contact, and made watertight without

the use of washers or other packing material.


85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 3

D. ADA Insulation Kit: Provide fully molded, flexible vinyl insulation system. System shall meet

all ADA requirements. Include P-trap insulation, hot and cold water angle valve insulation and

fasteners. Shall be white in color.

E. All fixtures fitted to walls shall have the mating surface ground square and true.

F. All lavatories, urinals and water closets to be white vitreous china.

2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORT

A. Fixture Supports: Wall hung fixtures shall be supported by means of chair carriers, except as

otherwise specified.

B. Lavatories and Sinks: All wall hung lavatories and sinks shall be supported by means of a chair

carrier with rectangular steel uprights and integral steel feet, supporting arms and sleeves

mounted on adjustable steel headers (with escutcheons for slab type lavatory). System shall be

complete with alignment tresses and mounting fasteners.

C. Water Closets: Wall hung water closets shall be supported by means of an approved

combination soil pipe fitting and closet carrier with stub feet for bolting to floor of a type as

required by the fixture and wall construction.

D. Urinals: Shall be supported by means of a chair carrier with stub feet at floor and overhead

construction, continuous pipe supports, plates, bolts, etc., of a type as required by the fixture

and the building construction.

E. Wall hung fixtures, except water closets, may be supported from back wall plates where wall

thickness cannot accommodate chair carriers.

2.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on drawings for make, model and accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Determine rough-in requirements for water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping

systems and supports, and verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture

installation. Follow manufacturer’s rough-in data for all fixtures.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be

installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers’

written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.


85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 4

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures, wall

mounted water closets, and urinals.

4. Wall hung fixtures, except water closets, may be supported from back wall plates where

wall thickness cannot accommodate chair carriers. Where wall hung fixtures are

mounted on stud walls, provide 18 gauge sheet steel plates screwed or spot welded to the

surface of the studs in accordance with the following schedule:

Fixture Length to

Height of plate Attach To

Lavatories 8” 4 studs

Water Coolers 18” 3 studs

Urinals 24” 3 studs

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall

bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturer’s written instructions and roughing-

in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

J. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary

drainage system.

K. Install waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide

side of compartment.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect fixtures to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,

waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 5

C. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Divisions:

Connect fixtures and equipment to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and

waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment.

D. Provide transformer and all low voltage wiring and connections from electrically operated

sensor fixtures to transformer. Install in accordance with Division 26 requirements.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems.”

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where

installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified

components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

Replace washers and seals of leaking faucets and stops.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate

properly. Verify proper flow and stream.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers’ recommended cleaning methods

and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS

A. For all other equipment (not specifically herein mentioned), furnished under other contracts or

by the Owner, requiring water, waste, and vent piping (see drawings), provide same, making all

final connections as required. Water piping to all equipment shall be valved.

B. Provide vacuum breakers where required by Code and/or as indicated on the drawings.


85094

PLUMBING FIXTURES

224000 - 6



85094

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

224700 - 1

SECTION 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fixtures and related components:

1. Water coolers.

2. Drinking fountains.

3. Fixture supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and

accessories.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and





intended use.

B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,”

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

C. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, “Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-

Water Coolers,” for water coolers and with ARI’s “Directory of Certified Drinking Water

Coolers” for type and style classifications.

D. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, “Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants,” for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate rough-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be

installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. Install fixtures at heights

indicated by the Architect and in accordance with Code.


85094


224700 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixtures, trim and accessories were selected as named in the fixture types on the basis of style,

quality, and finish free from flaws and scratches. Subject to compliance with the requirements,

provide products of one of the following:

1. Chair Carriers and Fixture Supports: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Tyler Pipe/Wade, Watts,

Zurn.

2. Water Coolers/Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Filtrine, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Oasis,

Stern-Williams, Sunroc.

2.2 WATER COOLERS / BOTTLE FILLER

A. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on drawings for make, model and accessories.

2.3 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet

and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.

1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.

2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.

3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of

steel pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Determine rough-in requirements for water and waste piping systems and verify actual locations

of piping connections before fixture installation. Follow manufacturer’s rough-in data for all

fixtures.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless


B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to

mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install fixtures level and plumb according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. For

fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install water-supply piping on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution

piping.


85094


224700 - 3

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

F. Install chrome plated pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use

deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are

specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect fixtures to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,

waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


Systems.”

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”


A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with

requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper

flow and stream height. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.

1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,

and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.



85094

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Transition fittings.



5. Sleeves.

6. Escutcheons.

7. Grout.

8. HVAC demolition.

9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.


1.3 SUBMITTALS













C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting

electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum

energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.



85094


230500 - 2

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,


moisture.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Mechanical drawings are symbolic and diagrammatic and are intended to show only the general

scheme, equipment involved and the approximate locations of materials and equipment.

Coordinate installation of systems with other trades to avoid conflicts. Notify Engineer of

unresolvable conflicts prior to fabrication and installation of systems.

B. Obtain dimensions from the Architectural drawings wherever possible instead of scaling the

Mechanical drawings. Consult the Architectural drawings for details of construction, location

of suspended ceilings and other pertinent information. Architect’s drawings, however, shall not

take precedence over field measurements. Carefully investigate the structural and finish

conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly.

C. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and

accessories, which may be required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be

required to meet such conditions.

D. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place


F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are

concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08

Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

G. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for all floors to a scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”

or larger, detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and

materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate

locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and

coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but

not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of major HVAC, piping, plumbing, and fire protection

systems, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly

required for periodic maintenance.

b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

c. Fire rated wall and floor penetrations.

d. Equipment connections and support details.

e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

f. Exact locations of new ductwork and piping relative to floor, shafts, underside of

construction, HVAC ducts and piping, electrical raceway, and conduit, etc.

g. Drawings shall be reviewed and signed by authorized representatives of all

construction trades.


85094


230500 - 3

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings.



B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless


a. Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.

b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face



D. Plastic, Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper phosphorus alloys for general duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,

unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall


H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.


85094


230500 - 4

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer’s

Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent cement

joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer’s SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent cement joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include

brass end, solvent cement joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder

joint, plain, or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure

at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Flange Kits: Companion flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full

face or ring type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic

washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300 psig minimum

working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;

plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.





following manufacturers:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.






85094


230500 - 5

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length


element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.


C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain







2.7 ESCUTCHEONS



opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome plated

finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.


D. One-Piece, Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish.

E. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome

plated finish.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,





A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION


85094


230500 - 6

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION



B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be

removed.





3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork

material.




operational.





quality.










piping systems.



loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Because of the small scale of the

drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required.

Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.

C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

D. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.


85094


230500 - 7

E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions,




other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings



3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between



prohibited in air plenums.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum board

partitions.









F. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve



2. Install cast iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required

for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure

plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

G. Underground, Exterior Wall or Slab on Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron “wall pipes”


for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required

for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure

plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors



I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.

J. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in

requirements.



85094


230500 - 8





assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook,” using

lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube”

Chapter, using copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and


H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service


I. Plastic Piping Solvent Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other than schedule number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or

paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to

pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.


85094


230500 - 9

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections

“Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and


3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment

base plates, and anchors.









85094


230500 - 10












85094

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer’s factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, variable frequency controllers, installed units, and accessory

devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

5. Variable frequency controllers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


85094


FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 2

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer’s standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

4. Provide shaft grounding system.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.


85094


FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 3

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



85094

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and

equipment:


2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.

7. Equipment supports.


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.



1.4 SUBMITTALS




A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and

installation of supports and anchors.

B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and

Factory Mutual approved.

C. MSS Standard Compliance:

1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply

with ANSI/MSS SP-58.

2. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components. Refer to Part 3

“Hanger and Support Applications” Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.


following:




4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.

5. Grinnell Corp.

6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

C. Copper Clad Hangers: For use with copper piping.

D. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped

E. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

F. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of

bearing surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from

structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.


following:


2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.

3. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.

4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.4 THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal

shield.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 3


following:



3. Pipe Shields, Inc.

C. Insulation Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient

air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion

resistant components to support roof mounted piping.


A. Description: Welded, shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural steel

shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems

and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings or copper clad hangers on attachments for electrolytic protection

where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,

NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow

off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of


7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated


8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 5

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion

support and cast iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from

2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical


20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if

small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical


21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to

NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4

to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 6

10. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts or Wood Blocking: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


base support.

7. Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not



85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 7

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


N. Use powder actuated fasteners or mechanical expansion anchors instead of building attachments

where required in concrete construction.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building

structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Thermal Hanger Shield or Wood Blocking Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for

insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual.

2. Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not

penetrate roof membrane.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,

expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2, and at

changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts

to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 8

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building

services piping) are not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and

ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

N. Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod size pipe shall be as scheduled below. The

maximum allowable load column includes a safety factor of 5 and is to be used to calculate rod

sizes for trapeze hangers and equipment hanging.

1. Provide hangers for cast iron soil pipe at 5 foot intervals, except 10 foot intervals where

10 foot lengths are used.

2. Provide hangers at 32 inch intervals for plastic pipe.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 9

3. Hanger Schedule:

Pipe Size Steel Copper Min. Rod Diameter

& Max. allow. load

1/2” & 3/4” 7’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

1” & 1-1/4” 6’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

1-1/2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.

2-1/2” 10’ 9’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.

3” & larger 10’ 10’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.

3/4” 2710 lbs.

7/8” 3770 lbs.


A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 10

HANGER AND SUPPORT TYPE CHART


85094


AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 11



85094

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC


230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes HVAC piping and equipment vibration controls as herein specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR DESIGNATION

A. Refer to the following vibration isolator designation for description. See Equipment Isolation

Schedule at end of this Section for type and deflection.

B. TYPE A SPRING MOUNTING WITH VERTICAL LIMIT STOPS


following:



c. Vibration Mountings & Controls.

2. Free standing with sound deadening pads and leveling bolts with limit stops. Spring

diameter-to-compressed operating spring height ratio – 1 to 1. Spring loaded minimum

additional available travel – 50% of rated defection.

C. TYPE B NEOPRENE AND SPRING


following:


b. Vibration Mountings & Controls.


85094



230548 - 2

2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring diameter to

compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or greater. Spring loaded minimum

additional available travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring diameter and hanger box hole

large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the

box.

D. TYPE C SPRING


following:


b. Vibration Mountings & Controls.

2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene hanger in series. Precompressed by

the manufacturer to the rated deflection to keep piping or equipment at a fixed elevation

during installation. Spring diameter to compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or

greater. Spring loaded minimum additional travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring

diameter and hanger box hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a

30 degree arc before contacting the box.

E. TYPE F VERTICAL PIPING ANCHOR AND GUIDE ISOLATORS


following:


2. Acoustical pipe anchor and guide isolators consisting of telescopic arrangement of two

sizes steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2” thickness of heavy duty neoprene and

duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints by similar method to prevent

vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material not to exceed

500 PSI with a balanced design for equal resistance in any direction.

F. TYPE G DUCTWORK SPRING ISOLATOR HANGERS:


following:


2. Spring type isolation hangers. Spring diameter minimum .8 of spring operating height.

Minimum additional spring travel before going solid 50% of rated deflection. Spring

diameter and hanger box lower hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through

30 arc before contacting box. Spring precompressed at factory by manufacturer.

Furnish eye bolts for attachment to ductwork straps.

G. TYPE H VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURB


following:

a. Thycurb, A Division of Thybar Corp.

2. Factory fabricated combination roof mounting curb and vibration eliminator base. The

vibration eliminating portion of the assembly shall be constructed of structural steel and

designed to match perfectly the bottom of the equipment. The roof curb shall be

complete with wood nailing strip and continuous 8” rubber watertight counter flashing.


85094



230548 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.



A. Provide hose or connector isolators on suction and discharge of all rotating and reciprocating

equipment.

B. Galvanize isolator body and cadmium plate isolator springs in outdoor applications.

C. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

3.3 PIPING ISOLATION

A. Isolate all piping connected to isolated mechanical equipment within the confines of the

mechanical equipment room but for not less than 50’. Isolator types will be as follows:

B. Spring deflections - first 3 supports - equal to connected isolated equipment but not less than

.75”. Balance of supports .75” deflection.

C. Floor mounted Type A.

D. Ceiling suspended Type C (first 3 supports) and Type B thereafter.

E. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.


3.4 RISER ISOLATION

A. Suspend or support risers by Type F hangers or Type A mountings and anchor or guide risers

with Type F isolators. Minimum spring deflections of .75” except in those expansion locations

where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load transfer to plus or minus 25%

of initial stress.



85094



230548 - 4

3.5 DUCTWORK ISOLATION

A. Isolate all ductwork over 4” static pressure connected to isolated equipment within the confines

of the mechanical equipment room but not less than 50’. Isolate from the building structure by

means of Type G hangers or Type A floor mountings.


PART 4 - EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE


EQUIPMENT LOCATION ISOLATION

TYPE

TOTAL

DEFLECTION

Utility Set Fan Roof/Mechanical Rooms on Upper

Floors

B – D 2.0 inches

Compressor/Condenser Unit Roof B 2.5 inches

Compressor/Condenser Unit Roof H 2.5 inches



85094

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Plastic tape.

3. Duct labels.

4. Stencils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling

and include used stencils in maintenance materials.


A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors and viewing angles of

identification devices.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,


2. Letter Color: White.


85094


230553 - 2

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering

two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment’s unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing Room

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules). Equipment schedule

shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,


B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to

three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Provide the following sign for chilled water cooling coils with no glycol in the

system: “Drain chilled water cooling coil when outdoor temperature reaches 35F and blow out

with compressed air. Flush with 50% ethylene glycol/water solution and blow out again.”

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.


85094


230553 - 3

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not

less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inches wide tape markers for pipes 6 inches or larger and provide 3/4 inch

wide tape markers for pipes less than 6 inches.

C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter

height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and

door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel, black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

C. Provide equipment labels for the following general categories of equipment and operational

devices:

1. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption units.

2. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar

equipment.

3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.


85094


230553 - 4

3.3 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Duct Label: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of

50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.



85094

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Kitchen hood airflow balancing.

3. Existing systems TAB.

4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on

approved forms certified by TAB firm.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the

following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified

and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and

Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” or NEBB’s “Procedural

Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.”

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC’s “National Standards

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” and NEBB’s

“Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,”

Section II, “Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification.”

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently

if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the

name of party performing instrument calibration.


85094


230593 - 2


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner’s

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner’s

operations.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other contractors to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days’ advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems’ designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,

cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

D. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,

such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and

fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are

accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment

operation.

E. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air

Conditioning Systems” or NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

of Environmental Systems” and this Section.


85094


230593 - 3

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and

balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer’s outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

3.4 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. Work with the Temperature Control

Contractor to verify minimum outside air damper positions and air quantities as well as to

determine static pressure setpoints for individual systems.

3.5 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in a

binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems in the format

recommended by applicable standards.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and

balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak

summer and winter conditions.



85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 1

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Calcium silicate.

b. Cellular glass.

c. Flexible elastomeric.

d. Mineral fiber.

e. Polystyrene.

2. Fire rated insulation systems (kitchen hood exhaust ductwork).

3. Field applied fabric reinforcing mesh.

4. Field applied jackets.


1. Division 22 Section “Plumbing Insulation.”

2. Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed



A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 2

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field applied jackets and finishes and

for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Calcium Silicate:


a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.

2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply

with ASTM C 533, Type I.

3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for

dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied

Jackets” Article.


a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.

b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.

4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type II, Class 2.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 3

6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

I. Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory applied jacket

requirements are specified in “Factory Applied Jackets” Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

J. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with

factory applied ASJ. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied

Jackets” Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.

c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.

d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.

e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.

f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

K. Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation.

Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall

not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.038 W/m x K) after 180 days of aging. Fabricate

shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.

b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 4

2.2 FIELD APPLIED FABRIC REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count

of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

B. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.

with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.

C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by

10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.


a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.3 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High impact resistant, UV resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.

4. Factory fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45 and 90 degree, short and long radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including

fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system

schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 6

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to

maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 7

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves

to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.

For penetrations through fire rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves

and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.

Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3. Seal penetrations through fire rated assemblies.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 8

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “UNION.”

Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing

sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide

the two part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces

with a metal jacket.

3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 9

3.7 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket

Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09

painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following metal ductwork:

1. All HVAC systems’ supply ductwork, except ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces.

2. HVAC systems’ return air ductwork, except ductwork located in ceiling return plenums,

and return ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces.

3. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory.

4. Outdoor air intake ductwork and mixed air ductwork between exterior air entrance and

supply fan or HVAC unit inlet.

5. Relief air ductwork between main return duct and relief outlet.

6. HVAC supply and return ductwork located outside of building (include metal jacket

covering).

7. HVAC supply and return sound attenuators.

8. Combustion air intake ductwork.

9. All 100% exhaust or relief ductwork in unheated spaces or attics.

B. Insulate each ductwork system with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

1. Rigid fiberglass; 1-1/2 inch thick. Increase thickness to 2 inches in machine, fan and

equipment rooms. Supply and return ductwork located in unheated/uncooled attic spaces

shall be insulated with 3 inch thickness. Increase insulation to 3 inch thickness on

ductwork located outside of building. Protect all ductwork outside of building with

aluminum jacketing.

2. Flexible fiberglass; 1-1/2 inch thick. Application limited to concealed locations.

3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. COLD PIPE Insulation Thickness (inch) (Based on K value of 4.0 to 4.6)

PIPE SIZE (inch)

SERVICE Runouts* 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger

Refrig. Suction ***

40-55ºF (Interior)

1/2 1 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2

Refrig. Suction ***

40-55ºF (Exterior)

N/A 2 2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2

Cooling Coil Drain Pan

Waste **

1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 10

* Runouts 2 inch pipe size and smaller and 12 ft. long or less.

** May be fiberglass or equal “R” value of flexible unicellular.

*** May be fiberglass or flexible unicellular, except where exposed to weather it shall be flexible unicellular

painted, or metal jacketed fiberglass.

**** Shall be fiberglass.

B. Encase pipe insulation exposed in finished rooms from floor to 6 feet above floor with

aluminum jacketing.

C. Repair of Existing Insulation: Wherever covering on existing covered lines or equipment is

damaged due to this work, or omitted through construction which has been removed as part of

the project, it shall be repaired or replaced and shall match new insulation.

D. Specified in Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts”, underground ductwork shall be insulated with

1 inch thick polystyrene insulation on sides and bottom of duct.

E. Responsibility for Covering Materials: The Contractor shall be responsible for all covering

until the building is accepted. If to prevent mildewing and deterioration of the covering, it is

necessary to provide ventilation, the Contractor shall furnish, install and wire temporary fans for

this purpose.

F. Protective Coating of Elastomeric Insulated Surfaces: Protect all surfaces of elastomeric

insulation with one coat of paint. Color shall be as directed. Paint shall be Insco as

manufactured by the H.B. Fuller Company, or Insulcap as manufactured by the

Glidden Company.

G. Paint all surfaces of vapor barrier jacket insulation where the pipes, ducts, and equipment are

exposed in rooms. Paint shall be Insco or Insulcap, same as specified above, as a primer for

further painting.

H. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing

outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified.

3.10 INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE




3.11 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE




3.12 UNDERGROUND, FIELD INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct buried piping applications, install underground direct buried jacket over

insulation material.


85094

HVAC INSULATION

230700 - 11



85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 – NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Division 23 Section: “Common Work Results for HVAC” for required piping

specialties.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide a gas distribution to gas fired equipment, including making final gas connections to

each gas burning appliance.

B. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with gas service piping is specified in applicable

Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

C. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of California State Building Code,

NBFO and AGA.

D. Local Utility Compliance: Comply with requirements of local gas utility company.

E. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Valves.

5. Pressure regulators.


7. Grout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.

2. Corrugated, stainless steel tubing with associated components.

3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.

4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.


A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, “National Fuel Gas Code.”


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 2

B. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM’s “Fire Protection Approval Guide” if specified

to be FM approved.

C. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS’s “Directory of A.G.A. and C.G.A. Certified

Appliances and Accessories” if specified to be IAS listed.

D. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL’s “Gas and Oil Equipment Directory” if

specified to be UL listed.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,


moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory applied protective coatings to avoid damaging

coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner’s written

permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind

finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Access Doors and

Frames.”

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary

utility services according to requirements:

1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with

dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with

ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel,

Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE

pipe.

a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.

c. Acetal collets.

d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.

4. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe,

steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body.

b. PE body tube.

c. Buna-nitrile seals.

d. Acetal collets.

e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

5. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe

to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

a. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.

c. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.

d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends.

4. Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory applied, three layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat shrink PE sleeves.

C. Annealed Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K, ASTM B 88, Type L

(ASTM B 88M, Type B).


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 4

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.

2. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory applied, extruded PE a minimum of

0.022 inch thick.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.

3. Corrugated stainless steel tubing with polymer coating.

4. Operating Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.

5. End Fittings: Zinc coated steel.

6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

7. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Quick Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.

2. Nitrile seals.

3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.

4. For indoor or outdoor applications.

5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless steel basket with 50

percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles for where each valve type is

applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in “Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule”

Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials “WOG” permanently

marked on valve body.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 5

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in “Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule”

Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials “WOG” shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two Piece, Full Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


following:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded body packnut design with adjustable stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in “Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles.


9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with “WOG” indicated on valve body.

E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


following:

a. Lee Brass Company.

b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Plug: Bronze.

4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in “Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles.

5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with “WOG” indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 6


following:

a. American Meter Company.

b. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.

c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

d. Maxitrol Company.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port.

6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet stabilized, mineral filled nylon.

8. Single port, self contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory or field installed, stainless steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


following:

a. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.

b. Maxitrol Company.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.

6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet stabilized, mineral filled nylon.

7. Factory Applied Finish: Minimum three layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.

8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by



A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,

continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective

jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches

deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.



85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 7

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization

devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply

with requirements in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in a

vented containment conduit.

C. Install underground PE natural gas piping according to ASTM D2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Aboveground, Exterior and Underground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations Mechanical Sleeve

Seal Installation: Interior wall penetration sleeves and sleeve seals are specified in Division 23

Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

H. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in

Division 23 Section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.”

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.


systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 8

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of finished interior walls, ceilings, and floors. Escutcheons

are specified in Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

L. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Fire barrier penetrations are specified in Division 23 Section

“Common Work Results for HVAC.”

M. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for

roughing-in requirements.

N. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including

service meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install

where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and

same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or

cap.

O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure

protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

P. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or

floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

Q. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas

piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe

with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to

outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be

installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from

physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker

barriers.

3. Prohibited Locations:


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 9

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash

chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator

shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

R. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side

down.

S. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

T. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each

piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

U. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

V. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated

valve.

W. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in

Division 23 Section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.”

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless steel

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate

for servicing and testing.

D. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.


A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for

HVAC,” and the following:

1. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare

dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not

overtighten.


A. Provide hangers, supports, and anchor devices complying with Division 23 Section “Hangers

and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 10

B. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within

72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and

appliances or equipment.

C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as

practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment” for piping and valve identification. Install detectable warning tape directly above

gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements

and slabs.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers

with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat

pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3. Drawn temper copper tube with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe and

fittings with protective coating for copper tubing.

B. Exterior aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Galvanized steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Galvanized steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.

3. Drawn temper copper tube with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints.

B. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.


85094

NATURAL GAS PIPING

231123 - 11

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and

fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded or

wrought steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective

coating for steel piping.

3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves shall be one of the following:

1. Two piece, full port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

2. Bronze plug valve.

3. Cast iron, lubricated plug valve.



85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC” for required piping specialties.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include

pressure drop, based on manufacturer’s test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Filter dryers.

5. Strainers.

6. Pressure regulating valves.


C. Field quality control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems.”

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, “Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.”

D. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with “International

Mechanical Code” and State Code.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 2

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior

and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 inch misalignment in minimum 7 inch

long assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; Type, Grade, and wall thickness as

selected in Part 3 piping applications articles.

B. Wrought Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for welded joints.

C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets,

bevel welded end connection, and raised face.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

E. Flanged Unions:

1. Body: Ductile iron for NPS 2 to NPS 3. Apply rust resistant finish at factory.

2. Gasket: Fiber asbestos free.

3. Fasteners: Four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts. Apply rust resistant finish at

factory.

4. End Connections: Brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 3


long assembly.



F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless steel wire reinforced

protective jacket

2. End Connections:

a. NPS 2 and Larger: With flanged end connections.


long assembly.



2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged brass or valox hex cap.




C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated steel stem, and graphite seal.


7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball type check valve with stainless steel spring.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 4

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2” (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24 or 115-Volt ac coil.



8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled

by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Threaded.



G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse flow option (for heat pump applications only).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.


H. Straight Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



I. Angle Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.

3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.




J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 5

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.




K. Replaceable Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell with ductile iron cover, stainless steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications only).

5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



L. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications only).

5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4” connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



M. Mufflers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, drawn

temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper

fittings with brazed or soldered joints.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 6

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper

fittings with 95-5 tin antimony soldered joints.

3. NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with

Alloy HB soldered joints.

4. NPS 4: Schedule 40, black steel and wrought steel fittings with welded joints.

C. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper

fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper

fittings with 95-5 tin antimony soldered joints.

3. NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with

Alloy HB soldered joints.

4. NPS 4: Schedule 40, black steel and wrought steel fittings with welded joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless or packed angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless or packed angle valves on inlet and

outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction line

pressure at bulb location.

G. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe

safety relief valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

I. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 7

J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in

the suction line at the compressor.

K. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump down charge.

L. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Refer to Division 23 Sections “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” and “Sequence of

Operations for HVAC Controls” for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of

operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 8

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion valve bulb.

P. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following

procedures:

1. Shot blast the interior of piping.

2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing

by means of a wire or electrician’s tape.

3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.

Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.

4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube

or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.

6. Safety relief valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be

open to allow unrestricted flow.

Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.

R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness

insulation.

U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls.

V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section “Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding,

to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube

Handbook.”

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and

Tube.”

1. Use Type BcuP, copper phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg, cadmium free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 9

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service


3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hanger, support, and anchor devices complying with Division 23 Section “Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high and low pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 300 micrometers. Close the

vacuum line. If vacuum holds at least 500 micrometers for one hour without the

assistance of a vacuum pump, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high and low pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer’s written instructions:

1. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.


85094

REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 - 10

2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

3. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

4. Check open compressor motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.



85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution

systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 10 inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single wall, round, and flat oval spiral seam ducts and formed fittings.

3. Duct liner.

B. Refer to Part 4 – Schedule.


1. Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories” for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

2. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation” for ductwork insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and

ductwork products.


C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code

- Steel,” for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum,” for

aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, “Sheet Metal Welding Code,” for duct joint

and seam welding.

B. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal

and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

C. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

2. NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”

D. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.”


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and

having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed

to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville International, Inc.

c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent

erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 1 inch.

b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.

c. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without

projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.

3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire hazard

classification of duct liner system.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term “sealant” is not limited to materials of adhesive or

mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 3

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,

airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when

cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized

butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible” for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

3. Galvanized steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted

with zinc-chromate primer.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are

electrolytically separated from ducts.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction

according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” and

complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod

applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 4

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA’s

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer’s guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint

reinforcement.


following:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus Inc.

c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible,” Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.


following:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Lockformer.

c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 inch wg pressure class.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger

and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are

lined.

2.6 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct

liner is prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge

overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding

12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding

18 inches longitudinally.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 5

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either

channel or “Z” profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the

following locations:

1. Fan discharges.

2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

2.7 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Diameter as applied to flat oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a

circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat oval duct.

B. Round, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to

SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

C. Flat Oval, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.” Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in

diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.


following:

a. Lindab Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

c. Midwest Spiro.

d. SEMCO Incorporated.

e. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

f. Tangent Air.

D. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before

and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

2. Ducts 21 to 72 inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two

internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

3. Ducts Larger than 72 inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-2.

4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM

rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer’s

tolerances.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one

of the following:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2) Lindab Inc.

3) Midwest Spiro.

4) Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

5) Tangent Air.

5. Flat Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one

synthetic rubber gasket.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one

of the following:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 6

3) Midwest Spiro.

4) SEMCO Incorporated.

5) Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

6) Tangent Air.

E. 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” with metal thicknesses specified for

longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess

material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-

formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow

construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” unless


2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for

pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2 inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 36 inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 37 to 50 inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

c. Ducts 52 to 60 inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.

d. Ducts 62 to 84 inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for

pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 27 to 50 inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

c. Ducts 52 to 60 inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.

d. Ducts 62 to 84 inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

4. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal seam flat oval duct.

5. 90 Degree, 2 Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material

handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit

using radius elbows. Fabricate with single thickness turning vanes.

6. Round Elbows 8 inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die formed elbows for 45 and

90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate

nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for

30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate

nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

8. Round Elbows Larger than 14 inches in Diameter and All Flat Oval Elbows: Fabricate

gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

9. Die Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch

thick with 2 piece welded construction.

10. Round Gored Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non elbow fittings specified above.

11. Flat Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct specified

above.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 7

12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 inches in Diameter and Pressures through

10 inch wg: 0.022 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg.

2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.

3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg.

4. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 3-inch wg.

5. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

6. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible,” unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure

couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of

3 screws in each coupling.

F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions

unless specifically indicated.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire and smoke control dampers, lighting layouts, and

similar finished work.

K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward

to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 8

M. Non Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior

walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct

insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on

4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

N. Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior

walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke

dampers are specified in Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories.” Firestopping materials

and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow

SMACNA’s “Duct Cleanliness for New Construction.”

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible” for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards.” The duct size shown on the drawing is the free area of the lined duct. The sheet

metal duct size shall be increased to accommodate the duct liner thickness.

3.5 TEMPORARY CLOSURE

A. At ends of duct which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of

ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which

will prevent entrance of dust and debris until connections are to be completed.

3.6 WATER SEALING OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST/RELIEF PLENUMS

A. Contractor shall provide watertight seals for all ductwork seams at air intake plenums and

exhaust/relief plenums. Provide sealed drains and valved drain piping at bottom of plenums.

Bottom of air plenums shall be reinforced and sloped to the drain. Contractor shall provide duct

sealant procedure data as well as sealant manufacturer’s data to Engineer for review.

3.7 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch

intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one fourth of

failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.


85094

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 9

E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section “Air

Duct Accessories.”

B. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Air Duct

Leakage Test Manual” and prepare test reports:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

Give seven days’ advance notice for testing.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round

and flat oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than

and equal to 2 inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for

pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg.

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum

allowable.

PART 4 - SCHEDULE

4.1 SCHEDULE

A. Construct duct systems of following, except as otherwise noted on the drawing:

1. Square or rectangular section galvanized sheet metal:

a. Supply, return, toilet exhaust and general exhaust.

2. Square or rectangular section galvanized sheet metal lined duct:

a. Exhaust ductwork from building exit to 10 feet inside building.

b. Relief ductwork from building exit to 10 feet inside building.

c. Relief plenums (sides and top only).

3. Round or oval fabricated ducts:

a. Supply, return, toilet exhaust and general exhaust.

B. Outdoor duct system:

1. Exterior supply, return and exhaust.



85094

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers.

2. Balancing dampers.

3. Turning vanes.

4. Duct mounting access doors.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Flexible ducts.


1. Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for electric control, smoke

and fire/smoke dampers and damper actuators.

2. Division 28 Section “Fire Detection and Alarm” for duct-mounting smoke detectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications for each type of duct accessory, including

dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.


A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) high pressure and low pressure duct

construction standards.

B. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and

Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of

duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

C. UL Compliance:

1. Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories

(UL) Standard 555 “Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers”.

2. Construct, test, and label smoke dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories

(UL) Standard 555S, “Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control

Systems”.

D. Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,” and

NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”


85094


233300 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and

having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed

to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish

for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Airguide Corp.

3. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

4. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.

5. Arrow United Industries.

6. Cesco Inc.

7. Greenheck.

8. Imperial Damper and Louver Co., Inc.

9. Louvers & Dampers.

10. Nailor.

11. National Controlled Air.

12. Ruskin.

13. Safe Aire.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of

maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop,

steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static

pressure.

C. Frame: 0.063 inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.050 inch thick aluminum sheet.


85094


233300 - 3

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.3 BALANCING DAMPERS


following:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Airguide Corp.

3. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

4. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.

5. Arrow United Industries.

6. Cesco Inc.

7. Greenheck.

8. Imperial Damper and Louver Co., Inc.

9. Louvers & Dampers.

10. Nailor.

11. National Controlled Air.

12. Ruskin.

13. Safe Aire.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen

damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed

position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct

consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3 inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles

full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Balancing Dampers: Multiple or single blade, parallel or opposed blade design,

standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick,

with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to

walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic, or stainless-steel sleeve.

5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Jackshaft: 1 inch diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within pipe bearing assembly

mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple damper assembly.

E. Damper Hardware: Zinc plated, die cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 inch thick zinc

plated steel, and a 3/4 inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating

rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.


85094


233300 - 4

2.4 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible” for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS


following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating.

2. CESCO Products.

3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

5. Greenheck.

6. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

7. Nailor Industries Inc.

8. Ruskin Company.

9. Ventfabrics, Inc.

10. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with

insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include cam latches.

D. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

1. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less than 12 inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.

b. Up to 18 inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.

d. Sizes 24 by 48 inches and Larger: One additional hinge.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Corp.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 inch thick

aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.


85094


233300 - 5

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10 inch wg positive and 1.0 inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, “Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards,” for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized steel accessories

in galvanized steel and fibrous glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts where indicated.

D. Install balancing dampers in supply, return, and exhaust air branch ducts and ducts to individual

inlets and outlets so that the Testing and Balancing Contractor can complete balancing of the

system. Dampers in ductwork shall be installed as far as possible from inlet and outlet

locations.

E. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90o elbows in supply air systems, and elsewhere as

indicated.

F. Install access doors in ductwork adjacent to each item of equipment installed in ductwork,

including, but not limited to: smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers, hydronic coils, variable

volume terminals, duct reheat coils, duct thermostats, static pressure sensors, and control

dampers. Access panel shall be of sufficient size for access to equipment and for proper

cleaning.


85094


233300 - 6

G. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,

except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.

H. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment.”

I. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and

motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

J. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

K. Install flexible ducts in accordance with Section III of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards, Metal and Flexible.” Maximum length for flexible ductwork is 6’-0” extended

length.

L. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct

accessories properly with other work.

M. Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with

requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty

accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section “Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”



85094

CEILING FANS

233443 - 1

SECTION 233443 – CEILING FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Types of ceiling fans required for the project include the following:

1. Ceiling Mounted Fan

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for ceiling fans, including specifications, capacity

ratings, fan performance, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation

instructions.


A. AMCA Compliance: Provide ceiling fans which have been tested and rated in accordance with

AMCA Standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

B. UL Compliance: Provide ceiling fans which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of equipment supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING FANS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard pre-fabricated centrifugal direct-

driven ceiling mounted fan units of type and size indicated.

B. Motors shall comply with the requirements in Electrical Provisions for Mechanical Work.

C. Fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel.

D. Grill shall be constructed of aluminum.

E. Provide fan with backdraft damper.

F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following:

1. Greenheck.

2. Loren Cook.


85094

CEILING FANS

233443 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FANS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ceiling fans level and plumb and in

accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to

insure that ceiling fans serve their intended function.

B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and

retest.



85094

GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 – GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling and wall mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

B. Refer to diffuser, register and grille schedule on the drawings for base design type, model,

material, finish and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, “Standard

for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Titus Products Div., Phillips Industries Inc.

2. Carnes.

3. E.H. Price.

4. J & J.

5. Krueger Mfg. Co.

6. Metal Aire.

7. Nailor.

8. Anemostat.

9. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,

“Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.”


85094

GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

233713 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make

final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling

panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict

with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

D. For linear slot-type diffusers, install full-length supply air plenum boot, unless noted otherwise.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,

before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed

surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have

damaged finishes.



85094

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

238126 - 1

SECTION 238126 – SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or

concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of

product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static

pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section

“Product Requirements.”

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Section 5 - “Systems

and Equipment” and Section 7 - “Construction and Startup.”

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2010, Section 6 - “Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.”

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.”


85094


238126 - 2

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


following:

1. Daikin.

2. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.

3. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company.

4. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.

5. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp.

6. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.

7. York International Corp.

2.2 VRV WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by

Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010.

2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2010.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic

support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset

thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent

protection.

D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.

E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment.”


85094


238126 - 3

1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

F. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

2.3 VRV HEAT PUMP, AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable

panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.

Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Inverter driven variable speed scroll compressor. Hermetically sealed with

crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal-

and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: Scroll.

2. Variable speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-

reset low-pressure switch.

3. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.

H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

I. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, “Energy Standard for

Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections

“Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” and “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.”

B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

C. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,

with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.


85094


238126 - 4

E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer’s standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.” Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-

plated fasteners.

D. Install seismic restraints.

E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static

deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 23 Section “Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment.”

F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component’s quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.


Systems.”

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,

switches, and motor controls.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report

results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.


85094


238126 - 5

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.



85094

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common electrical installation requirements.

6. Electrical demolition.

7. Touchup painting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in

the building.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate chases, slots, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building

structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

E. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished

surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section

“Access Doors and Frames.”


85094


260500 - 2

F. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

G. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and

systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful

interoperability.

H. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other sections, include

connections for equipment specified in other Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe,” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no

side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches

(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm),

thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

2.3 TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer’s paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom

consistent with these requirements.


85094


260500 - 3

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

F. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other

building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified

in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor

or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,

unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable

penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section

“Penetration Firestopping.”

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.


85094


260500 - 4

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow

for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and

installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. For each electrical connection indicated or otherwise required, provide complete assembly of

materials, including but not necessarily limited to pressure connectors, terminals (lugs),

electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating

tubing, cable ties, solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete

splices and terminations of types indicated.

B. Install in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and with recognized

industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA’s

“Standard of Installation” to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.5 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or

disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal

capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Identify and maintain services that pass through remodeled area and serve devices and

equipment outside the remodeled area.

C. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be

demolished, in their entirety.

D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in

place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch

surface to match existing finish.

E. Remove demolished material from Project site.

F. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for

relocation.


85094


260500 - 5

G. Removal of PCB Ballasts: Provide a suitable collection container at the project site. Check

transformers and the ballasts in all fluorescent fixtures being removed, rewired, or reinstalled

under this Contract. Some transformers and ballasts are clearly labeled to indicate whether they

do or do not contain PCBs. If a transformer or ballast is not labeled, assume that it contains

PCBs. Remove from the fixtures all ballasts known or assumed to contain PCBs and place them

in the designated collection container. Place hazardous material including, but not limited to,

mercury switches and lamps in the designated collection container. Pick up the container and

recycle or dispose of it legally. Comply with the requirements of federal, state, and local

pollution control agency guidelines for removal and disposal of fluorescent lamps.

H. Existing Utilities: Locate existing utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to

remain, support and protect services during excavation operations.

1. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.

2. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for

instructions.

3. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by

selective demolition.

I. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed

surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and

refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Replace damaged or faulty

components.



85094

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.




intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they

are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

3. General Cable Corporation.

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

5. Southwire Company.

6.


85094



260519 - 2

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-

THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in

raceway

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single

conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

I. Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


85094



260519 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems.”

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “Identification

for Electrical Systems.”

G. Remove existing wire from raceways before pulling in new wire and cable.

H. Seal around cable penetrating fire rated elements.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping





D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16

inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or

more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch

(3.5 mm).


85094



260519 - 4

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies


or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable

unless sleeve seal is to be installed

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to

Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to

Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing

units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and

sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Size

sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section “Penetration

Firestopping.”




1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors, for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.


85094



260519 - 5

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



85094

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment,:

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.

a.




intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Conductors: ASTM B 33.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of

conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,

with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.


85094


260526 - 2

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad3/4 inch by 10 feet .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis

possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection

methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

6. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are

not acceptable.

7. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

8. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

9. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

10. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

C.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-

mounted electrical devices operating at or above 120 V. Bond conductor to each unit and to air

duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.


85094


260526 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if

any.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type

connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building’s main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,

using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using

one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,

connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor

conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual

ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. 10 ohms.


85094


260526 - 4

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



85094

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.



C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the

applied force.





1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.”


85094


260529 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.


following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

6. .

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.


85094


260529 - 3

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel

shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding

specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for

1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems

above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb (90 kg).


85094


260529 - 4

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)

thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs

less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means

that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

(0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous

metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



85904

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Raceways.

2. Fittings.

3. Boxes.

4. Enclosures.

5. Cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS






intended use.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension

system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light

fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to

ensure maximum headroom, working clearance, and access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: Provide products that comply with requirements.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.


85904


260533 - 2

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used,

and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

H. .

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX Inc.

5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

6. Condux International, Inc.

7. ElecSYS, Inc.

8. Electri-Flex Co.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2.

C. LFNC: UL 1660.

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).


85904


260533 - 3

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For enclosure or cabinet components, provide manufacturer’s standard finish inside and

prime-coat finish ready for field painting on outside of enclosure or cabinet.

B. Finish: For enclosure or cabinet components, provide manufacturer’s standard finish applied to

interior and exterior of enclosures and cabinets before shipping.

2.5 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch

(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.


85904


260533 - 4

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

a.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Including but not limited

to raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading docks.

b. Corridors.

c. Mechanical rooms.

d. Stockrooms and warehouses.

e. Manufacturing facilities.

f. Generator rooms.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

6. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: EMT Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use

NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2

except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems.”

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:


85904


260533 - 5

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer’s written instructions.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end

of pull wire.

K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for

recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,

or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

L. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall.

M. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

N. Provide floor boxes with number of compartments required for services indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for pipe less than 6 inches

(150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within

12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and

complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth

Moving.”

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.


85904


260533 - 6

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or

foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping





D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side

greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches

(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness

shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies


or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

unless sleeve seal is to be installed

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to

Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply

with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements

are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”


85904


260533 - 7

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.



85094

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage

suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and

manufacturers’ technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and

finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.Submit final versions after load

balancing.


85094

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 2

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

“Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section

“Product Requirements.”

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not below -22 deg F (-30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F

(40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect’s written

permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.


85094

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.

c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

d. Square D.

B.

2.2 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault

currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with

front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating

plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral

limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on

opening of fuse compartment door.

6. GFCI Circuit Breakers for protection of personnel: Single- and two-pole configurations

with 5-mA trip sensitivity.

7. Ground Fault Protection for Equipment: Single- and two-pole configurations with

30-mA trip sensitivity.


85094

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 4

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and

number of poles.

1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.

2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section “Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.”

C. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts

uniformly flush with wall finish.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. .

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain

approval before installing. Use a computer to create directory; handwritten directories are not

acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


85094

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 5

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,

Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Rebalance and recheck

as necessary.

3.4 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Twist-locking receptacles.

3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

4. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

5. Lighting Control Devices

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers’ packing

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one

source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and

associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 2

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers’ Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers’ names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when

device is tripped. Device shall fit in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.

b. Leviton; 6598.

c. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

C. Weather Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Listed Weather Resistant

with WR marking.


a. Cooper; WRVGF20.

b. Leviton; WR899.

2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of

30 percent.


85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 3

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way).

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way).

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.

b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.

c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is “ON.”

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.

b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.

c. Leviton; 1221-2L.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.6 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Refer to Drawings for lighting control system requirements. .

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws:

a. Metal with head color to match plate finish.

b. Stainless steel for stainless steel plates, aluminum plates and exterior applications.

c. Solid brass for brass plates.

d. Chrome plated steel for chrome plated plates.

e. Galvanized steel for galvanized plates.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: To be selected by architect.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel

B. Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in

“wet locations.”


85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 4

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover that is weatherproof whether or not the

attachment plug cap is inserted.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: To Be Selected by Architect

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by

riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show

signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. Remove any paint that accidentally

comes in contact with devices and assemblies.

5. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length.


85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 5

6. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.

8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension

vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.

B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified

in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,

stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and

durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

3. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at

least six times.

4. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to

manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.


85094

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 6

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly

painted wall plates or devices.



85094

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.

2. Exit signs.

3. Lighting fixture supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.

3. Ballast.

4. Energy-efficiency data.




intended use.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-

suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.


85094

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 2

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

F. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is

indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,

comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” for channel-

and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling

canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount

a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless

steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.


85094

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each

fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support

element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate

not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans

or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two

3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting

fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor

of 3.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.”


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.

C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

D. Tests: As follows:

1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.

3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.

4. Report results in writing.

E. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure

until units operate properly.

F. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.


85094

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 4

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials

recommended by manufacturer.





PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 1

SECTION 32 17 23

PAVERMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Traffic markings including symbols, directional arrows, lettering and safety and loading

zones

2. Parking-stall lines and related accessibility pavement markings

3. Pedestrian and related accessibility pavement markings

4. Fire lane markings

B. Related Sections

1. 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.2 ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS

A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, as amended

1. ADA Standards - ADA Title II Regulations and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible

Design

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM C 881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

2. ASTM D 788 - Classification System for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) (PMMA) Molding

and Extrusion Compounds

C. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Qaulity Management District

1. SCAQMD-1113 - SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings

D. CALTrans - California Department of Transportation

1. CALTrans Manual - CALTrans Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices

2. CALTrans Specifications - CALTrans Standard Specifications

E. CBC - 2013 California Building Code (CCR Title 24, Part 2)

1. CBC-11 B - CBC Chapter 11 B, Access to Public Buildings, Public Accommodations,

Commercial Facilities and Publicly Funded Housing

F. Fed.Std I Fed.Spec - Federal Standard I Federal Specification

1. Fed.Std-595B - Colors Listed in Government Procurement

2. Fed.Spec TT-P-1952D - Paint, Traffic And Airfield Marking, Waterborne

G. MUTCD - Department of Transportation, Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices

H. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction





1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal

1. Product Data for each paint system product and accessory item including certifications of

the following:

a. VOC content

b. Distances from following material process locations to Site

1) raw material harvest, collection or extraction

2) product or component fabrication

3) final material manufacture, if different than component fabrication

2. Shop Drawings of traffic and parking markings

B. Record Submittals

1. Manufacturer's Application Instructions


A. Paints and Coatings shall have VOC content within limits set by SCAQMD Regulations.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Pavement markings for designated accessible parking spaces and related pedestrian

stripping shall conform to ADA Standards and CBC-11 B.

2. Traffic control pavement and curb markings shall be in accordance with SSPWC,

Sections 210-1.6 and 310-5.6.

3. Paint products shall dry to a finish as slip resistant as surrounding pavement.

C. Manufacturer: company with minimum 10-years' experience manufacturing traffic line paint

products for commercial projects similar in scale, complexity and quality to those required for

this Project.

D. Installer: company with minimum 6-years' experience painting traffic and related pavement

markings for commercial projects similar in scale, complexity and quality to those required for

this Project.

E. Field Samples

1. Provide field sample in form of < insert description >, illustrating coating [color] [colors],

width of stroke, thickness of application and dimensioning.

2. Location: acceptable to Architect.

3. Modify materials and methods of installation as required to obtain Architect's approval.

4. Document materials and methods used to obtain Architect's approval. Maintain at least

one copy of this documentation in a readily accessible location on Site while this work is

in progress.

5. Maintain access to and protect Field Samples from damage while this work is in progress.

6. Upon acceptance of related work, Field Samples in acceptable condition may remain as

part of the work.






A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original, sealed containers with labels legible and

intact.

1. Labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,

coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation and instructions for

mixing and reducing.

2. Inspect materials upon delivery for defects, missing, and non-complying items.

3. Make claims, or place orders to obtain proper materials in a timely manner; do not delay

the orderly progress of the work.

B. Store paint materials at ambient temperatures between 45- and 90-degrees-F, unless expressly

permitted otherwise in manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. For each color of pavement marking paint furnish, as Extra Material, [a five-gallon unopened]

[a quantity equal to approximately 3-percent of quantity required for its installation rounded up

to next higher five-gallon] container of the paint.

1. Extra Materials shall be from same production run as installed materials.

2. In addition to manufacturer's label, label each container for color, dates and locations of

related installations and shelf life.

3. Deliver Extra Materials to Owner as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessible parking spaces shall be located as near as practical to a primary entrance and shall be

marked according to CBC Sections 11B-502.3.4.

B. Surface slopes of accessible parking spaces and access aisles shall be the minimum possible and

shall not exceed 2% slope in any direction. CBC Section 11B-502.4.

C. Loading and unloading access aisle shall be marked by a border painted blue. Within the blue

border, hatched lines a maximum of 36" on center shall be painted a color contrasting with the

parking surface, preferable blue or white. CBC Figures 11B -502.3.

D. When blue color is used, it shall conform to Color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 595B.

E. Painted lines and markings on pavement are recommended to be 3" wide minimum.

2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers. Products of following manufacturers form basis of design and

quality intended for this Project.

1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation, Los Angeles, CA





2. Glidden Professional, Commerce, CA

3. Frazee Paint and Wallcovering, Inc., Anaheim, CA

4. The Sherwin-Williams Company, Santa Ana, CA

5. Vista Paint, Fullerton, CA.

6. Or equal, approved in accordance with Division 01 requirements for substitutions.

B. Traffic Line Paint: lead and chromate free, ready mixed, waterbourne emulsion type, complying

with Fed. Spec TT-P-1952E, Type I (for use under normal conditions) Type II (for use under

adverse conditions), with drying time of less than 45 minutes. Furnish paints in containers of at

least 18.9 L (5 gallons).

1. Colors

a. Accessible Markings for Parking Stalls, Passenger Drop-Off Area and Related

Markings: Fed. Std 595B, Color No. 15090, Blue, except that International Symbol

of Access and NO PARKING notices marked on pavement shall be white.

b. Other Parking Stall Lines and Traffic Control markings: [white] [yellow].

c. Fire Lane markings: red with white lettering.

d. Temporary Parking, markings: green with white lettering.

e. Passenger / Postal Loading Zones, markings: white with black lettering.

f. Commercial Loading Zone and Carpool Parking Space markings: yellow with

black lettering.

2. Acceptable Products

a. Dunn-Edwards, Vin-L-Stripe Traffic Marking Paint, W801, acrylic.

b. ICI, Traffic Paint 4800 Series, acrylic.

c. Frazee, No. 506 Traffic Line Paint

d. Vista Paint: 6900 (White), 6901 (Yellow)Traffic Paint

e. Pervo, Pervo Stripe Series 6000

f. Or equal

C. Reflective Paint: SSPWC Table 210-1.6.1 (A) and 210-1.6.5 rapid dry paint.

1. Reflective material: glass beads added to surface of final coat of paint prior to setting.

Glass beads shall conform to Calif. State Specification 8010-004(type II), applied

mechanically at 8 lbs of beads per gallon of paint, dispensed by device developed for the

purpose.

a. For thermoplastic paint glass beads may be added to directly to the paint per

2101.6.1 with additionally adding 1 pound of beads per gallon.

2. Color: White, Yellow, or Black per Cal Trans Manual.

3. Acceptable Products: by Emedco Buffalo, NY, or equal. ]

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Raised Pavement Markers: CALTrans Manual, Section 85, [Type A-non-reflective white] [Type

AY-non-reflective yellow], ceramic disks (Bott's Dots).

B. Raised Pavement Markers: rectangular, raised, 4- by 4- by 3/4-inch, ASTM 0 788, Grade 8

high-impact, plastic highway pavement markers with beveled edges and dual prismatic,

reflective lenses.

1. Reflector Color: [white] [amber] except furnish blue for fire hydrant marker location.

2. Acceptable Products: Hy-Viz, or equal.





C. Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type IV Grade, 3, Class B epoxy type, rapid set, CALTrans Manual,

Sections 85-1.055 and 95-2.04.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning installation

means acceptance of existing conditions including the preparatory work of others, if any.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean pavement/concrete in immediate vicinity of markings as directed by paint manufacturer.

1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, water or other

contaminates.

2. Existing lines to be removed shall be sandblasted clean.

B. Do not apply traffic paint until seal coat has been in place minimum of 10 days.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints by machine spray, airless sprayer, roller or brush to provide a minimum OFT of 15

mils. Precise edges are required; no overspray will be accepted.

1. Striping: single, 4 inch wide lines, unless double lines are shown on drawings.

B. Perform Work in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and with SSPWC Section 3105.6.8.

1. Striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be in accordance with SSPWC,

Sections 210-1.6 and 310-5.6 and accessibility requirements, where applicable.

2. Passenger Loading Zone. Paint accessible passenger transfer area as indicated.

C. Painted lines and markings on pavement shall be 4 inches minimum wide and blue In color

equal to color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 595B.

D. At Fire Lanes paint curbs, or if there is no curb, paint 6 inch red stripe and let dry. Then stencil

4-inch high lettering reading NO PARKING - FIRE LANE at maximum 20 feet on center on

painted curb or stripe, as applicable.

E. At Temporary Parking, paint curbs and let dry. Then, stencil 4-inch lettering that reads

TEMPORARY PARKING 20 MINUTES centered in each parking space.

F. At Loading Zone, paint curbs and let dry. Then, stencil 4-inch high lettering that reads

LOADING ZONE - NO PARKING at maximum 30 feet on center on painted curb.

G. At Carpool Parking Spaces, paint Wheel-stops and let dry. Then, stencil 3-inch high lettering

that reads CARPOOL PARKING ONLY.





3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove any paint that demonstrates evidence of checking, cracking, peeling, discoloration, lack

of bonding or poor coverage. Misplaced lines shall be completely removed by paint remover or

wet abrasive-blasting in accordance with SSPWC, Section 310.5.6.3. Painting over misplaced

lines will not be permitted. Provide new complying work without claim for change in Contract

Sum or Schedule.

END OF SECTION

CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT

FIRE STATION NO. 28 RENOVATION

GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

EXHIBIT A

TEST REPORT: ASBETOS ANALYSIS OF BULK MATERIALS

TEST REPORT: LEAD IN PAINT CHIPS COLLECTION DATE: 06/06/2019

LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030

Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982

http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]

321913035LA Testing Order:

Customer ID: 32IHMI62

Customer PO:

Project ID:

Attention: Phone:Mark Hammer (626) 447-5237

Fax:IHM, Inc. (626) 447-3486

Received Date:122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330 06/07/2019 11:00 AM

Analysis Date:Arcadia, CA 91006 06/10/2019

Collected Date: 06/06/2019

Project: 1918.02 Fire Sta 28

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized

Light Microscopy

Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous

Non-Asbestos Asbestos

% Type

F28-ASB-1A-Roof

Sheeting

321913035-0001

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Glass10%Gray/Black

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-1A-Tar

321913035-0001A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-1B-Roof

Sheeting

321913035-0002


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-1B-Tar

321913035-0002A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-1C-Roof

Sheeting

321913035-0003


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-1C-Tar

321913035-0003A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof sheeting

F28-ASB-2A-Felt

321913035-0004

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-2A-Tar

321913035-0004A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-2B-Felt

321913035-0005


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-2B-Tar

321913035-0005A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-2C-Felt

321913035-0006


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-2C-Tar

321913035-0006A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-3A-Felt

321913035-0007


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-3A-Insulation

321913035-0007A

None DetectedPerlite

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

10%

Cellulose70%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-3B-Felt

321913035-0008


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37

Page 1 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM


Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982




Customer PO:

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

F28-ASB-3B-Insulation

321913035-0008A


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

10%

Cellulose70%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-3C-Felt

321913035-0009


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

No insulation present

F28-ASB-3C-Tar

321913035-0009A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof felt

F28-ASB-4A

321913035-0010


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

10%

Cellulose70%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Insulation board

F28-ASB-4B

321913035-0011


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

10%

Cellulose70%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Insulation board

F28-ASB-4C

321913035-0012


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

10%

Cellulose70%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Insulation board

F28-ASB-5A-Coating

321913035-0013

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-5A-Mastic

321913035-0013A

12% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)73%Cellulose15%Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-5B-Coating

321913035-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-5B-Mastic

321913035-0014A

15% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)85%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-5C-Coating

321913035-0015


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-5C-Mastic

321913035-0015A

12% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)68%Cellulose20%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof mastic

F28-ASB-6A-Insulation

321913035-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-6A-Gummy

321913035-0016A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-6B-Insulation

321913035-0017


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-6B-Gummy

321913035-0017A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-6C-Insulation

321913035-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-6C-Gummy 1

321913035-0018A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy




Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982




Customer PO:

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

F28-ASB-6C-Gummy 2

321913035-0018B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe insulation,

gummy

F28-ASB-7A

321913035-0019

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window putty

F28-ASB-7B

321913035-0020

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window putty

F28-ASB-7C

321913035-0021

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window putty

F28-ASB-8

321913035-0022

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)35%Cellulose65%Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vapor barrier

F28-ASB-9A

321913035-0023

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)78%Cellulose

Glass

20%

2%

Brown/White

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall

F28-ASB-9B

321913035-0024


Glass

20%

2%

Brown/White

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall

F28-ASB-9C

321913035-0025


Glass

20%

2%

Brown/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Drywall

F28-ASB-10A-Tape

321913035-0026

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Cellulose98%Brown

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10A-Joint

Compound

321913035-0026A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10A-Mastic

321913035-0026B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10B-Tape

321913035-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10B-Joint

Compound

321913035-0027A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10B-Mastic 1

321913035-0027B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound


321913035-0027C


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10B- Drywall

321913035-0027D


Glass

3%

2%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

F28-ASB-10C-Tape

321913035-0028


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound

Insufficient mastic

F28-ASB-10C-Joint

Compound

321913035-0028A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam tape/joint

compound




Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982




Customer PO:

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

F28-ASB-11A-Skim

Coat

321913035-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster w/skim coat &

button board

No button board present for analysis.

F28-ASB-11A-Plaster

321913035-0029A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-11B-Skim

Coat

321913035-0030


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-11B-Plaster

321913035-0030A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-11B-Button

Board

321913035-0030B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Brown/White

Fibrous

Heterogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-11C-Skim

Coat

321913035-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-11C-Plaster

321913035-0031A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


button board

F28-ASB-12A-Floor Tile

321913035-0032

11% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)89%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12A-Mastic 1

321913035-0032A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12A-Mastic 2

321913035-0032B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Green

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12B-Floor Tile

321913035-0033


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic


321913035-0033A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic


321913035-0033B


Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12C-Floor Tile

321913035-0034


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12C-Mastic 1

321913035-0034A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-12C-Mastic 2

321913035-0034B


Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Floor tile, 9x9 &

mastic

F28-ASB-13A-Cove

Base

321913035-0035


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic




Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982




Customer PO:

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

F28-ASB-13A-Mastic

321913035-0035A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic

F28-ASB-13B-Cove

Base

321913035-0036


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic

F28-ASB-13B-Mastic

321913035-0036A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic

F28-ASB-13C-Cove

Base

321913035-0037


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic

F28-ASB-13C-Mastic

321913035-0037A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove base & mastic

Analyst(s)

Olivia Santiago (50)

Sydney Wittman (23)

Jerry Drapala Ph.D, Laboratory Manager

or Other Approved Signatory

EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis . The above analyses were performed in general compliance with Appendix E to Subpart E of 40 CFR (previously EPA 600/M4-82-020 "Interim

Method"), but augmented with procedures outlined in the 1993 ("final") version of the method. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without

written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations . Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. All

samples received in acceptable condition unless otherwise noted. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of

the federal government. EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction for all non -friable organically bound materials prior to analysis. Estimation of uncertainty is available on request.

Samples analyzed by LA Testing South Pasadena, CA NVLAP Lab Code 200232-0, CA ELAP 2283



LA Testing520 Mission Street, South Pasadena, CA 91030Phone/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982http://www.LATesting.com [email protected]

321913035CustomerID: 32IHMI62CustomerPO:ProjectID:

LA Testing Order:

Attn: Mark HammerIHM, Inc.122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330Arcadia, CA 91006

Received: 06/07/19 11:00 AM

1918.02 Fire Sta 28

Fax: (626) 447-3486Phone: (626) 447-5237

Project:

6/11/2019Analysis Date:6/6/2019Collected:

SAMPLE ID APPEARANCE NON- ASBESTOS % NON-FIBROUS

(%) Matrix Organic Acid

ASBESTOS % TYPESDESCRIPTION

NON- ASBESTOS % Fibrous

Test Report: Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) - Point Count Performed by EPA M4-82-020 ModifiedMethod with Gravimetric Reduction and 1000 Point Count

F28-ASB-7A321913035-0019

Gray/White 13.0Window puttyNon-FibrousHomogeneous

75.1 Chrysotile<0.1Non-fibrous (other)12.0

F28-ASB-7B321913035-0020

Gray/White 16.5Window puttyNon-FibrousHomogeneous

70.6 Chrysotile<0.1Non-fibrous (other)12.9

Jerry Drapala Ph.D, Laboratory Manageror other approved signatory

Test Report PLMPCGrav-7.26.0 Printed: 6/12/2019 9:12:03 AM 1

Analyst(s)

THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.

Disclaimers: Some samples may contain asbestos fibers present in dimensions below PLM resolution limits. LA Testing suggests that samples reported as <0.1% or none detected undergo additional analysis via TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by LA Testing. This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the United States Government. LA Testing bears no responsibility for sample collection activities, analytical method limitations, or the accuracy of results when requested to separate layer samples. LA Testing liability is limited to the cost of sample analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted.Samples analyzed by LA Testing South Pasadena, CA

Olivia Santiago (2)

Initial report from 06/11/2019 08:56:45

http://www.LATesting.com

mailto:[email protected]

OrderID: 321913035

Page 1 Of 2

OrderID: 321913035

Page 2 Of 2

ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

LA Testing5431 Industrial Drive, Huntington Beach, CA 92649Phone/Fax: (714) 828-4999 / (714) 828-4944http://www.LATesting.com [email protected]

Attn: Mark HammerIHM, Inc.122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330Arcadia, CA 91006

Received: 06/07/19 1:30 PM

1918.02 / Fire Sta 28

Fax: (626) 447-3486Phone: (626) 447-5237

Project:

6/6/2019Collected:

331912014CustomerID: 32IHMI62CustomerPO:ProjectID:

LA Testing Order:

Site: Eaves, blue paint3800 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g

331912014-00011606/6/2019F28-PB-1 ppm

Site: Window frame, beige paint4500 ppm6/10/2019 0.281 g

331912014-00021606/6/2019F28-PB-2 ppm

Site: Wall, beige paint830 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g

331912014-0003806/6/2019F28-PB-3 ppm

Site: Wall, gray paint220 ppm6/10/2019 0.282 g

331912014-0004806/6/2019F28-PB-4 ppm

Site: Wall, tan paint13000 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g

331912014-00054006/6/2019F28-PB-5 ppm

Site: Door jamb, brown paint3300 ppm6/10/2019 0.275 g

331912014-0006806/6/2019F28-PB-6 ppm

Site: Wall, beige paint1900 ppm6/10/2019 0.263 g

331912014-0007806/6/2019F28-PB-7 ppm

Site: Ceramic tile, tan11000 ppm6/10/2019 0.296 g

331912014-00084006/6/2019F28-PB-8 ppm

Site: Floor, brown580 ppm6/10/2019 0.28 g

331912014-0009806/6/2019F28-PB-9 ppm

Report revised for ppm concentration.

Page 1 of 1Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 6/11/2019 11:50:05 AM

Michael Chapman, Laboratory Manageror other approved signatory

*Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.010 % wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by LA Testing Huntington Beach, CA AIHA-LAP, LLC--ELLAP Accredited #101650, CA ELAP 1406

Report Amended: 06/11/2019 11:50:05 Replaces the Inital Report 06/10/2019 12:15:13. Reason Code: Client-Other (see report comment)

http://www.LATesting.com

mailto:[email protected]

OrderID: 331912014

Page 1 Of 2

OrderID: 331912014

Page 2 Of 2

CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT

Documents

Transcript of CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT